Nikon Camcorder D5300 User Manual

DIGITAL CAMERA  
Reference Manual  
En  
Table of Contents  
For Your Safety ........................................................................................................................viii  
Notices.......................................................................................................................................... xi  
Location Data............................................................................................................................xv  
Wireless ......................................................................................................................................xvi  
Introduction  
Getting to Know the Camera................................................................................................. 1  
The Mode Dial............................................................................................................................ 3  
The Viewfinder........................................................................................................................... 4  
The Monitor ................................................................................................................................ 5  
Camera Menus: An Overview ................................................................................................ 8  
First Steps ...................................................................................................................................11  
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)  
Framing Photos in the Viewfinder.....................................................................................20  
Framing Photos in the Monitor ..........................................................................................24  
Recording Movies....................................................................................................................27  
Viewing Movies........................................................................................................................28  
Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)  
The Mode Dial..........................................................................................................................31  
k Portrait...............................................................................................................................31  
p Child...................................................................................................................................31  
m Sports.................................................................................................................................32  
n Close up............................................................................................................................32  
i
 
Other Scenes ............................................................................................................................ 33  
u Sunset ............................................................................................................................... 34  
y Blossom ............................................................................................................................ 36  
0 Food.................................................................................................................................... 36  
Special Effects  
2 High Key ........................................................................................................................... 39  
3 Low Key ............................................................................................................................ 40  
More on Photography  
Choosing a Release Mode ....................................................................................................45  
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)..................................................................................46  
Quiet Shutter Release ............................................................................................................48  
Self-Timer Mode.......................................................................................................................49  
Focus (Viewfinder Photography).......................................................................................51  
Choosing How the Camera Focuses: Focus Mode ..................................................... 51  
Choosing How the Focus Point Is Selected: AF-Area Mode.................................... 53  
Focus Lock................................................................................................................................. 55  
Manual Focus........................................................................................................................... 57  
Image Quality and Size..........................................................................................................59  
Image Quality........................................................................................................................... 59  
Image Size................................................................................................................................. 61  
Using the Built-in Flash..........................................................................................................62  
ii  
ISO Sensitivity............................................................................................................................67  
Interval Timer Photography.................................................................................................68  
Remote Control Photography.............................................................................................70  
Restoring Default Settings ...................................................................................................72  
Location Data............................................................................................................................74  
Embedding Location Data in Photos and Movies.......................................................74  
Track Logs..................................................................................................................................76  
Deleting Logs ...........................................................................................................................78  
GPS Options..............................................................................................................................79  
P, S, A, and M Modes  
Shutter Speed and Aperture................................................................................................82  
Exposure .....................................................................................................................................90  
Metering.....................................................................................................................................90  
Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows ...............................................................94  
Multiple Exposure....................................................................................................................98  
White Balance ........................................................................................................................ 101  
Preset Manual........................................................................................................................ 104  
Bracketing ............................................................................................................................... 108  
Picture Controls..................................................................................................................... 111  
Live View  
Framing Photographs in the Monitor ........................................................................... 118  
iii  
Recording and Viewing Movies  
Recording Movies................................................................................................................. 126  
Movie Settings.......................................................................................................................128  
Viewing Movies ..................................................................................................................... 130  
Editing Movies ....................................................................................................................... 131  
Playback and Deletion  
Full-Frame Playback............................................................................................................. 135  
Thumbnail Playback ............................................................................................................ 140  
Calendar Playback................................................................................................................ 141  
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom........................................................................... 142  
Protecting Photographs from Deletion........................................................................ 143  
Rating Pictures....................................................................................................................... 144  
Deleting Photographs ........................................................................................................ 146  
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback........................................................146  
Slide Shows............................................................................................................................. 149  
Connections  
Installing ViewNX 2 .............................................................................................................. 151  
Using ViewNX 2..................................................................................................................... 153  
View Pictures..........................................................................................................................154  
Printing Photographs.......................................................................................................... 156  
Viewing Pictures on TV....................................................................................................... 164  
iv  
Wi-Fi  
What Wi-Fi Can Do for You................................................................................................ 167  
Accessing the Camera......................................................................................................... 168  
Selecting Pictures for Upload........................................................................................... 173  
Camera Menus  
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images ........................................................................... 175  
Rotate Tall .......................................................................................................................... 176  
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options ............................................................................ 177  
Color Space........................................................................................................................ 179  
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings................................................................... 182  
a: Autofocus ........................................................................................................................... 184  
b: Exposure............................................................................................................................. 186  
c3: Self-Timer..................................................................................................................... 187  
d1: Beep .............................................................................................................................. 187  
v
d6: Print Date.....................................................................................................................190  
e: Bracketing/Flash...............................................................................................................192  
f: Controls ................................................................................................................................193  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup .......................................................................................... 195  
Language............................................................................................................................201  
Video Mode........................................................................................................................202  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies ................................................................. 205  
D-Lighting...........................................................................................................................207  
Trim.......................................................................................................................................208  
Filter Effects........................................................................................................................209  
Color Balance.....................................................................................................................210  
Resize....................................................................................................................................214  
Straighten...........................................................................................................................215  
Fisheye.................................................................................................................................216  
Color Outline .....................................................................................................................216  
Color Sketch.......................................................................................................................216  
vi  
m Recent Settings/O My Menu....................................................................................... 222  
O My Menu ............................................................................................................................ 223  
Technical Notes  
Compatible Lenses............................................................................................................... 226  
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)................................................................................. 232  
Flash Units Compatible with the Creative Lighting System (CLS)...................... 232  
Other Accessories ................................................................................................................. 236  
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter........................................................ 239  
Caring for the Camera......................................................................................................... 240  
Storage..................................................................................................................................... 240  
Cleaning .................................................................................................................................. 240  
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions............................................................. 245  
Available Settings................................................................................................................. 248  
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 251  
Battery/Display ..................................................................................................................... 251  
Playback .................................................................................................................................. 253  
Location Data ........................................................................................................................ 255  
Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................ 255  
Error Messages....................................................................................................................... 256  
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 259  
Lenses....................................................................................................................................... 266  
Memory Card Capacity ....................................................................................................... 272  
Battery Life .............................................................................................................................. 273  
Index.......................................................................................................................................... 274  
vii  
For Your Safety  
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others, read the following  
safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment. Keep these safety instructions  
where all those who use the product will read them.  
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this  
section are indicated by the following symbol:  
This icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all warnings before using  
this Nikon product.  
A
WARNINGS  
Keep the sun out of the frame  
Keep out of reach of children  
A
A
A
Keep the sun well out of the frame when  
shooting backlit subjects. Sunlight  
focused into the camera when the sun is  
in or close to the frame could cause a fire.  
Failure to observe this precaution could  
result in injury. In addition, note that  
small parts constitute a choking hazard.  
Should a child swallow any part of this  
equipment, consult a physician  
immediately.  
Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder  
Viewing the sun or other strong light  
source through the viewfinder could  
cause permanent visual impairment.  
A
A
Do not disassemble  
Touching the product’s internal parts  
could result in injury. In the event of  
malfunction, the product should be  
repaired only by a qualified technician.  
Should the product break open as the  
result of a fall or other accident, remove  
the battery and/or AC adapter and then  
take the product to a Nikon-authorized  
service center for inspection.  
Using the viewfinder diopter adjustment control  
When operating the viewfinder diopter  
adjustment control with your eye to the  
viewfinder, care should be taken not to  
put your finger in your eye accidentally.  
Turn off immediately in the event of malfunction  
Should you notice smoke or an unusual  
smell coming from the equipment or AC  
adapter (available separately), unplug  
the AC adapter and remove the battery  
immediately, taking care to avoid burns.  
Continued operation could result in  
injury. After removing the battery, take  
the equipment to a Nikon-authorized  
service center for inspection.  
A
Do not place the strap around the neck of an  
infant or child  
Placing the camera strap around the neck  
of an infant or child could result in  
strangulation.  
A
A
Do not remain in contact with the camera,  
battery, or charger for extended periods while  
the devices are on or in use  
Parts of the device become hot. Leaving  
the device in direct contact with the skin  
for extended periods may result in low-  
temperature burns.  
Do not use in the presence of flammable gas  
Do not use electronic equipment in the  
presence of flammable gas, as this could  
result in explosion or fire.  
A
viii  
   
Do not leave the product where it will be exposed  
to extremely high temperatures, such as in an  
enclosed automobile or in direct sunlight  
Failure to observe this precaution could  
cause damage or fire.  
Do not expose the battery to flame or to  
excessive heat.  
A
Do not immerse in or expose to water.  
Replace the terminal cover when  
transporting the battery. Do not  
transport or store the battery with  
metal objects such as necklaces or  
hairpins.  
Batteries are prone to leakage when  
fully discharged. To avoid damage to  
the product, be sure to remove the  
battery when no charge remains.  
When the battery is not in use, attach  
the terminal cover and store in a cool,  
dry place.  
The battery may be hot immediately  
after use or when the product has been  
used on battery power for an extended  
period. Before removing the battery  
turn the camera off and allow the  
battery to cool.  
Discontinue use immediately should  
you notice any changes in the battery,  
such as discoloration or deformation.  
Do not aim a flash at the operator of a motor  
vehicle  
Failure to observe this precaution could  
result in accidents.  
A
A
Observe caution when using the flash  
Using the camera with the flash in close  
contact with the skin or other objects  
could cause burns.  
Using the flash close to the subject’s  
eyes could cause temporary visual  
impairment. The flash should be no less  
than one meter (3 ft 4 in.) from the  
subject. Particular care should be  
observed when photographing infants.  
Avoid contact with liquid crystal  
A
Should the monitor break, care should be  
taken to avoid injury due to broken glass  
and to prevent the liquid crystal from the  
monitor touching the skin or entering  
the eyes or mouth.  
Do not carry tripods with a lens or camera  
attached  
You could trip or accidentally strike  
others, resulting in injury.  
A
A
Observe proper precautions when handling  
batteries  
Batteries may leak or explode if  
improperly handled. Observe the  
following precautions when handling  
batteries for use in this product:  
Use only batteries approved for use in  
this equipment.  
Do not short or disassemble the battery.  
Be sure the product is off before  
replacing the battery. If you are using  
an AC adapter, be sure it is unplugged.  
Do not attempt to insert the battery  
upside down or backwards.  
ix  
Observe proper precautions when handling the  
charger  
Keep dry. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in fire or electric  
shock.  
Do not short the charger terminals.  
Failure to observe this precaution could  
result in overheating and damage to  
the charger.  
Dust on or near the metal parts of the  
plug should be removed with a dry  
cloth. Continued use could result in fire.  
Do not go near the charger during  
thunderstorms. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in electric  
shock.  
Do not handle the plug or charger with  
wet hands. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in electric shock.  
Do not use with travel converters or  
adapters designed to convert from one  
voltage to another or with DC-to-AC  
inverters. Failure to observe this  
precaution could damage the product  
or cause overheating or fire.  
CD-ROMs  
A
A
A
CD-ROMs containing software or  
manuals should not be played back on  
audio CD equipment. Playing CD-ROMs  
on an audio CD player could cause  
hearing loss or damage the equipment.  
Follow the directions of airline and hospital  
personnel  
Remove Eye-Fi cards, disable Wi-Fi, and  
select Off for Location data > Record  
location data before boarding an  
aircraft, and turn the product off during  
takeoff and landing or when so directed  
by airline or hospital staff. Radio waves  
emitted by the device could interfere  
with aircraft navigation or hospital  
medical equipment.  
Use appropriate cables  
A
When connecting cables to the input and  
output jacks, use only the cables  
provided or sold by Nikon for the  
purpose to maintain compliance with  
product regulations.  
x
 
Notices  
No part of the manuals included with this  
product may be reproduced, transmitted,  
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or  
translated into any language in any form,  
by any means, without Nikon’s prior  
written permission.  
Nikon reserves the right to change the  
specifications of the hardware and  
software described in these manuals at  
any time and without prior notice.  
Nikon will not be held liable for any  
damages resulting from the use of this  
product.  
While every effort has been made to  
ensure that the information in these  
manuals is accurate and complete, we  
would appreciate it were you to bring any  
errors or omissions to the attention of the  
Nikon representative in your area (address  
provided separately).  
Notice for Customers in Canada  
CAN ICES-3 B / NMB-3 B  
Notices for Customers in Europe  
CAUTION  
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED  
BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.  
This symbol indicates that  
electrical and electronic  
equipment is to be collected  
separately.  
This symbol on the battery  
indicates that the battery is to be  
collected separately.  
The following apply only to users in  
European countries:  
The following apply only to users in  
European countries:  
This product is designated for separate  
collection at an appropriate collection  
point. Do not dispose of as household  
waste.  
All batteries, whether marked with this  
symbol or not, are designated for separate  
collection at an appropriate collection  
point. Do not dispose of as household  
waste.  
Separate collection and recycling helps  
conserve natural resources and prevent  
negative consequences for human health  
and the environment that might result  
from incorrect disposal.  
For more information, contact the retailer  
or the local authorities in charge of waste  
management.  
For more information, contact the retailer  
or the local authorities in charge of waste  
management.  
xi  
 
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.  
The Battery Charger  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS  
DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY  
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS  
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter of the proper  
configuration for the power outlet if needed. This power unit is intended to be correctly  
oriented in a vertical or floor mount position.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement  
This equipment has been tested and found  
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
These limits are designed to provide  
D5300  
reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed  
and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in  
a particular installation. If this equipment  
does cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be  
determined by turning the equipment off  
and on, the user is encouraged to try to  
correct the interference by one or more of  
the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the  
equipment and receiver.  
CAUTIONS  
Modifications  
The FCC requires the user be notified that any  
changes or modifications made to this device  
that are not expressly approved by Nikon  
Corporation may void the user’s authority to  
operate the equipment.  
Interface Cables  
Use the interface cables sold or provided by  
Nikon for your equipment. Using other  
interface cables may exceed the limits of  
Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
Notice for Customers in the State of California  
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product  
may expose you to lead, a chemical known to  
the State of California to cause birth defects  
or other reproductive harm. Wash hands  
after handling.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a  
circuit different from that to which the  
receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced  
radio/television technician for help.  
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,  
Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.  
Tel.: 631-547-4200  
xii  
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction  
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced  
by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be punishable by law.  
Items prohibited by law from being copied or  
reproduced  
Cautions on certain copies and reproductions  
The government has issued cautions on  
copies or reproductions of securities issued  
by private companies (shares, bills, checks,  
gift certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or  
coupon tickets, except when a minimum of  
necessary copies are to be provided for  
business use by a company. Also, do not  
copy or reproduce passports issued by the  
government, licenses issued by public  
agencies and private groups, ID cards, and  
tickets, such as passes and meal coupons.  
Do not copy or reproduce paper money,  
coins, securities, government bonds, or  
local government bonds, even if such  
copies or reproductions are stamped  
“Sample.”  
The copying or reproduction of paper  
money, coins, or securities which are  
circulated in a foreign country is prohibited.  
Unless the prior permission of the  
government has been obtained, the  
copying or reproduction of unused postage  
stamps or post cards issued by the  
government is prohibited.  
Comply with copyright notices  
The copying or reproduction of  
copyrighted creative works such as books,  
music, paintings, woodcuts, prints, maps,  
drawings, movies, and photographs is  
governed by national and international  
copyright laws. Do not use this product for  
the purpose of making illegal copies or to  
infringe copyright laws.  
The copying or reproduction of stamps  
issued by the government and of certified  
documents stipulated by law is prohibited.  
Disposing of Data Storage Devices  
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices  
does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered  
from discarded storage devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting in  
the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s  
responsibility.  
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, select Off  
for Location data > Record location data (0 74) in the setup menu and, erase all data using  
commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely refill it with images  
containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to also replace  
any pictures selected for preset manual (0 104). To delete track log data on a memory card,  
select Location data > Log list and delete all logs as described on page 78. Wi-Fi settings can  
be reset to default values by selecting Wi-Fi > Network settings > Reset network settings in  
the setup menu. Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage  
devices.  
AVC Patent Portfolio License  
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-  
COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC  
VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND  
NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC  
VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE  
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE http://www.mpegla.com  
xiii  
 
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories  
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry.  
Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash  
accessories) certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are  
engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this  
electronic circuitry.  
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may  
void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not  
bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal  
operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.  
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized Nikon dealer.  
D Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories  
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital  
camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety  
requirements. THE USE OF NON-NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR  
NIKON WARRANTY.  
A Before Taking Important Pictures  
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the  
camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. Nikon  
will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.  
A Life-Long Learning  
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and  
education, continually-updated information is available on-line at the following sites:  
For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/  
For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/  
For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/  
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers to  
frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography.  
Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the  
following URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/  
xiv  
 
Location Data  
Track logs: Location data will be recorded with pictures taken while On is selected for Location  
data > Record location data (0 74). In addition, if Start is selected for Location data >  
Create log > Log location data in the setup menu (0 76), the camera continues to log  
location data even while off. Radio waves produced by the device may affect medical  
equipment and aircraft navigation systems; in situations in which the use of satellite  
navigation devices is restricted or prohibited, such as in hospitals or aircraft, be sure to select  
Off for Record location data and turn the camera off.  
Sharing location data: Note that addresses and other personal information may be inferred from  
the location data stored in track logs or embedded in images. Exercise caution when sharing  
images and track logs or when posting them to the Internet or other locations where they can  
be viewed by third parties. See “Disposing of Data Storage Devices” (0 xiii) for information on  
erasing location data before disposing of the camera or memory cards.  
Navigation: The position, altitude, and other location data reported by the device are  
approximations only and are not intended for surveying or navigation. Be sure to take  
appropriate maps or other navigational devices with you when using the product during such  
outdoor activities as mountain climbing or hiking.  
Restrictions on use: The location data function may not perform as expected in some countries or  
regions, including (as of November, 2013) China and in the vicinity of the Chinese border. Some  
countries, including China, prohibit unauthorized use of satellite navigation and other location  
data devices; before travelling, check with your travel agent or the embassy or tourism board  
of the countries you will be visiting. Where use is prohibited, select Off for Record location  
data.  
xv  
   
Wireless  
This product, which contains encryption software developed in the United States, is controlled  
by the United States Export Administration Regulations and may not be exported or re-  
exported to any country to which the United States embargoes goods. The following  
countries are currently subject to embargo: Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, and Syria.  
Notices for Customers in the U. S. A.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept  
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
FCC WARNING  
The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device  
that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation may void the user’s authority to operate  
the equipment.  
FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates,  
uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with  
the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is  
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by  
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by  
one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver  
is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Co-location  
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or  
transmitter.  
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.  
Tel.: 631-547-4200  
xvi  
   
Notices for Customers in Canada  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is  
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
FCC/IC RF Exposure Statement  
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with  
using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless  
devices are absolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency  
energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce  
health effects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does not produce heating  
effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have  
not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects  
might occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. The D5300,  
which is equipped with a LBWA1U5YR1 (FCC ID: VPYLBYR650/IC ID: 772C-LBYR650) wireless  
LAN module, has been tested and found to comply with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set  
forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure  
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure  
rules. Please refer to the SAR test report that was uploaded to FCC website.  
xvii  
Notices for Customers in Europe  
Hereby, Nikon, declares that the D5300 is in compliance with the essential  
requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. The declaration  
of conformity may be consulted at  
http://imaging.nikon.com/support/pdf/DoC_D5300.pdf  
Notice for Customers in Singapore  
Trade Name:  
Model: D5300  
This device complies with radio-frequency regulations. The content of certification labels not  
affixed to the device is given below.  
Complies with  
IDA Standards  
DA104328  
Security  
Although one of the benefits of this product is that it allows others to freely connect for the  
wireless exchange of data anywhere within its range, the following may occur if security is not  
enabled:  
Data theft: Malicious third-parties may intercept wireless transmissions to steal user IDs,  
passwords, and other personal information.  
Unauthorized access: Unauthorized users may gain access to the network and alter data or  
perform other malicious actions. Note that due the design of wireless networks, specialized  
attacks may allow unauthorized access even when security is enabled.  
xviii  
 
Introduction  
Getting to Know the Camera  
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays. You  
may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the  
rest of the manual.  
The Camera Body  
13  
3
2 1  
24  
25  
4
14  
15  
5
6
7
8
26  
4
16  
27  
28  
29  
30  
11  
9
17  
10  
18  
19  
20  
12  
22  
23  
21  
1 Mode dial...................................3 12 CPU contacts  
23 Lens mount ......................13, 58  
2 Live view switch  
Live view.....................24, 118  
13 Built-in flash............................ 62 24 Accessory shoe cover  
14 Speaker...................................... 2 25 Accessory shoe (for optional  
Movie...........................27, 126  
3 R (information) button...6, 123  
4 Eyelets for camera strap.......11  
5 E/N button  
flash units)......................... 232  
26 Stereo microphone............. 128  
15 Focal plane mark (E)........... 58  
16 M/ Y button  
Flash mode .................. 62, 64 27 Connector for external  
Flash compensation ......... 93 microphone....................... 129  
17 Connector cover  
18 Fn button  
Using the Fn button........193  
Exposure compensation....92  
Adjusting aperture............87  
Flash compensation..........93  
28 USB and A/V connector  
Connecting to a  
computer....................... 153  
6
Shutter-release button...20, 21  
Connecting to a printer  
......................................... 156  
Connecting to a TV......... 164  
29 Accessory terminal ............. 237  
30 HDMI mini-pin connector  
............................................. 165  
19 Mounting mark...................... 13  
20 Lens release button .............. 18  
21 s/E/# button ...................... 45  
Continuous shooting ........46  
Self-timer ............................ 49  
Remote control.................. 70  
22 Mirror......................................243  
7 Power switch.............................2  
8 Movie-record button ...28, 126  
9 Infrared receiver for ML-L3  
remote control (front)....... 70  
10 AF-assist illuminator ....52, 185  
Self-timer lamp ......................49  
Red-eye reduction lamp  
.........................................63, 65  
11 Body cap  
1
             
1
7
8
9
10  
2
11  
12  
13  
3
4
14  
15  
16  
5
17  
18  
19  
21  
20  
22  
6
1 Viewfinder eyepiece.. 4, 15, 50 8 P button  
14 Multi selector ............................9  
15 O button  
Changing settings in the  
2 Rubber eyecup ...................... 50  
information display ......... 7  
Rating pictures, retouching  
photos, editing movies,  
and selecting pictures for  
upload to a smart  
device..............................135  
Restoring default  
settings.............................72  
Deleting pictures during  
playback.................. 22, 146  
16 Memory card access  
lamp............................ 21, 118  
17 Power connector cover for  
optional power  
connector ..........................239  
18 Battery-chamber cover  
latch ................................12, 17  
19 Battery-chamber cover  
..........................................12, 17  
20 W/Q button  
Thumbnails.......................140  
Playback zoom out .........142  
Help.........................................8  
21 X button  
Playback zoom in............142  
22 Battery latch .....................12, 17  
3 G button  
Menus............................8, 175  
Restoring default  
settings ............................ 72  
4
Infrared receiver for ML-L3  
remote control (rear)..........70  
5 Monitor  
Viewing settings...................6  
9 A/L button  
Live view .................... 24, 118  
Full-frame playback  
.................................. 22, 135  
Using the A (L) button  
...................................56, 194  
Protecting photographs  
from deletion ................143  
6 Tripod socket  
7 Diopter adjustment  
10 Command dial  
control .................................. 15  
11 K button  
Playback......................22, 135  
12 Memory card slot  
cover............................... 12, 17  
13 J (OK) button ......................... 9  
D The Speaker  
Do not place the speaker in close proximity to magnetic devices. Failure to observe this  
precaution could affect the data recorded on the magnetic devices.  
A The Power Switch  
Rotate the power switch as shown to turn  
the camera on.  
Rotate the power switch as shown to turn  
the camera off.  
2
       
The Mode Dial  
The camera offers a choice of the following shooting modes:  
P, S, A, and M Modes  
Select these modes for full control over  
camera settings.  
Special Effects Modes  
Use special effects during shooting.  
% Night vision (0 37)  
P—Programmed auto (0 84)  
S —Shutter-priority auto (0 85)  
A—Aperture-priority auto (0 86)  
M—Manual (0 87)  
g Color sketch (0 38, 41)  
' Toy camera effect (0 38, 42)  
( Miniature effect (0 38, 42)  
3 Selective color (0 39, 43)  
1 Silhouette (0 39)  
2 High key (0 39)  
3 Low key (0 40)  
) HDR painting (0 40)  
Auto Modes  
Select these modes for simple, point-and-  
shoot photography.  
i Auto (0 19)  
j Auto (flash off) (0 19)  
Scene Modes  
The camera automatically optimizes settings to suit the scene selected with the mode dial.  
Match your selection to the scene being photographed.  
k Portrait (0 31)  
l Landscape (0 31)  
p Child (0 31)  
m Sports (0 32)  
n Close up (0 32)  
h Other scenes (0 33)  
3
                                               
The Viewfinder  
1
2
3
7 8  
9
10  
11 12 13 14 15  
4
5
6
16  
17  
18 20  
19  
21  
1
Framing grid (displayed when 10 Aperture (f-number).............83 15 Flash-ready indicator ........... 23  
On is selected for Custom  
Setting d2) ........................ 188  
11 Special effects mode  
16 Flexible program  
indicator............................... 84  
indicator ...............................37  
2 Focus points ........................... 55  
3 AF area brackets..............15, 20  
4 Low battery warning............ 16  
5 Monochrome indicator  
(displayed in % mode or  
12 Bracketing indicator ...........108 17 Exposure indicator................ 87  
Exposure compensation  
display .................................. 92  
Electronic rangefinder .......185  
18 Flash compensation  
13 Number of exposures  
remaining ............................15  
Number of shots remaining  
before memory buffer  
fills..........................................47  
White balance recording  
indicator .............................104  
Exposure compensation  
value......................................92  
Flash compensation  
value......................................93  
ISO sensitivity ................67, 188  
Capture mode indicator  
indicator............................... 93  
19 Exposure compensation  
indicator............................... 92  
20 Auto ISO sensitivity  
indicator.............................181  
21 Warning indicator ...............256  
when the Monochrome  
Picture Control or a Picture  
Control based on  
Monochrome is  
selected) ..................... 37, 111  
6 “No memory card”  
indicator............................... 12  
7 Focus indicator ................20, 57  
8 Autoexposure (AE) lock  
indicator............................... 91  
9 Shutter speed ........................ 83  
14 “k” (appears when memory  
remains for over 1000  
exposures)............................15  
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.  
D The Viewfinder  
The response time and brightness of the viewfinder display may vary with temperature.  
4
       
The Monitor  
The monitor can be angled and rotated as shown below.  
180°  
90°  
180°  
Normal use  
Fold the monitor against the camera face out.  
This position is recommended for normal  
photography.  
Low-angle shots  
Frame live view shots with the camera close to  
the ground.  
High-angle shots  
Frame live view shots while holding the camera  
over your head.  
Self-portraits  
Use for self-portraits in live view. The monitor  
shows a mirror image of what will appear in the  
final picture.  
D Using the Monitor  
Rotate the monitor gently within the limits shown. Do not use force. Failure to observe these  
precautions could damage the connection between the monitor and the camera body. To  
protect the monitor when the camera is not in use, fold it back face down against the camera  
body.  
5
         
The Information Display  
Viewing settings: To view the information display, press the R  
button.  
R button  
1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1516 17  
2
3
18  
19  
4
5
20  
21  
6
7
23  
22  
1 Shooting mode  
9 Wi-Fi connection  
20 Number of exposures  
remaining ............................ 15  
White balance recording  
indicator.............................104  
Capture mode indicator  
21 “k” (appears when memory  
remains for over 1000  
exposures) ........................... 15  
22 Exposure indicator................ 87  
Exposure compensation  
i auto/  
indicator .............................172  
10 Track log indicator.................77  
11 Satellite signal indicator ......75  
12 Exposure delay mode.........189  
13 Multiple exposure  
indicator .............................100  
14 Print date indicator .............190  
15 Flash control indicator........192  
Flash compensation indicator  
for optional flash units....235  
16 “Beep” indicator...................187  
17 Battery indicator....................16  
18 ISO sensitivity .........................67  
ISO sensitivity  
j auto (flash off).............. 19  
Scene modes...................... 30  
Special effects mode........ 37  
P, S, A, and M modes.......... 82  
2 Aperture (f-number) ............ 83  
Aperture display.................... 83  
3 Shutter speed ........................ 83  
Shutter-speed display.......... 83  
4 Bracketing indicator........... 108  
5 Autoexposure (AE) lock  
indicator............................... 91  
6 Auto-area AF indicator ........ 53  
3D-tracking indicator........... 53  
Focus point............................. 55  
7 Release mode ........................ 45  
8 Eye-Fi connection  
indicator............................... 92  
Bracketing progress  
indicator.............................110  
23 Help icon ...............................256  
display..........................67, 181  
Auto ISO sensitivity  
indicator .............................181  
indicator............................. 204  
19 ADL bracketing amount ....109  
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.  
6
   
Changing settings: To change the settings at the bottom of the  
display, press the P button, then highlight items using the multi  
selector and press J to view options for the highlighted item.  
P button  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
14  
13 12  
11 10  
9
8
1 Image quality..........................59 6 White balance ......................101 12 AF-area mode ................53, 120  
2 Image size................................61 7 ISO sensitivity......................... 67 13 Focus mode....................51, 119  
3 Auto bracketing .................. 109 8 Exposure compensation...... 92 14 Picture Control..................... 111  
4 HDR (High Dynamic  
Range)...................................96  
5 Active D-Lighting...................94  
9 Flash compensation ............. 93  
10 Flash mode ...................... 63, 65  
11 Metering.................................. 90  
A Turning the Monitor Off  
To clear shooting information from the monitor, press the R button or press the shutter-  
release button halfway. The monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are  
performed for about 8 seconds (for information on choosing how long the monitor stays on,  
see Auto off timers on page 186).  
7
     
Camera Menus: An Overview  
Most shooting, playback, and setup options can  
be accessed from the camera menus. To view the  
menus, press the G button.  
G button  
Tabs  
Choose from the following menus:  
D: Playback (0 175)  
C: Shooting (0 177)  
A: Custom Settings (0 182)  
B: Setup (0 195)  
N: Retouch (0 205)  
m/O: Recent settings or My Menu (defaults  
to Recent settings; 0 222)  
Current settings are shown by icons.  
Menu options  
Options in current menu.  
d
A description of the currently selected option or menu  
can be displayed by pressing the W (Q) button. Press 1  
or 3 to scroll through the display. Press W (Q) again to  
return to the menus.  
W (Q) button  
8
       
Using Camera Menus  
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the camera menus.  
Move cursor up  
J button: select highlighted item  
Select highlighted item or  
Cancel and return to  
previous menu  
display sub-menu  
Move cursor down  
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.  
1 Display the menus.  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
G button  
2 Highlight the icon for the current menu.  
Press 4 to highlight the icon for the current  
menu.  
3 Select a menu.  
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.  
9
 
4 Position the cursor in the selected menu.  
Press 2 to position the cursor in the selected  
menu.  
5 Highlight a menu item.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a menu item.  
6 Display options.  
Press 2 to display options for the selected menu  
item.  
7 Highlight an option.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option.  
8 Select the highlighted item.  
Press J to select the highlighted item. To exit  
without making a selection, press the G  
button.  
Note the following:  
Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available.  
While pressing 2 generally has the same effect as pressing J, there are some  
cases in which selection can only be made by pressing J.  
To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-release button  
halfway (0 21).  
First Steps  
Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing batteries or memory cards.  
1 Attach the strap.  
Attach the strap as shown. Repeat for the second eyelet.  
2 Charge the battery.  
If a plug adapter is supplied, raise the wall plug and connect the plug adapter  
as shown below at left, making sure the plug is fully inserted. Insert the battery  
and plug the charger in. An exhausted battery will fully charge in about an hour  
and 50 minutes.  
Battery charging  
Charging complete  
D During Charging  
Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging. Failure to observe this  
precaution could in very rare instances result in the charger showing that charging is  
complete when the battery is only partially charged. Remove and reinsert the battery to  
begin charging again.  
     
3 Insert the battery and memory card.  
Insert the battery in the orientation shown, using the battery to keep the  
orange battery latch pressed to one side. The latch locks the battery in place  
when the battery is fully inserted.  
Battery latch  
Slide the memory card in until it clicks into place.  
GB  
16  
A The Write Protect Switch  
SD memory cards are equipped with a write protect switch to  
prevent accidental loss of data. When this switch is in the  
“lock” position, the memory card can not be formatted and  
photos can not be deleted or recorded (a beep will sound if  
you attempt to release the shutter). To unlock the memory  
card, slide the switch to the “write” position.  
G B 1 6  
Write-protect switch  
D Memory Cards  
Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing memory cards  
from the camera.  
Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not remove memory  
cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove or disconnect the power source  
during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer.  
Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the  
camera or card.  
Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.  
Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.  
Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution could damage  
the card.  
Do not expose to water, heat, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.  
Do not format memory cards in a computer.  
     
4 Attach a lens.  
Be careful to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens or body cap  
is removed.  
Remove the camera  
body cap  
Remove the rear  
lens cap  
Mounting mark (camera)  
Align the mounting marks  
Mounting mark (lens)  
Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place.  
Be sure to remove the lens cap before taking pictures.  
   
5 Open the monitor.  
Open the monitor as shown. Do not use force.  
6 Turn the camera on.  
A language-selection dialog will be displayed.  
7 Choose a language and set the camera  
clock.  
Move cursor up  
J button: select  
highlighted item  
Use the multi selector and J button to  
select a language and set the camera clock.  
Select highlighted  
item or display  
sub-menu  
Move cursor down  
q
r
w
t
e
Select language  
Select time zone  
Set time and date  
Select date format  
Select daylight saving  
time option  
(note that the camera  
uses a 24-hour clock)  
         
8 Check the battery level and number of exposures remaining.  
Press the R button and check the battery level and  
number of exposures remaining. In the case of exposures  
remaining, values over 1000 are shown in thousands,  
indicated by the letter “k.  
R button  
Battery level (0 16)  
Number of exposures  
remaining  
9 Focus the viewfinder.  
After removing the lens cap, rotate the diopter  
adjustment control until the AF area brackets are  
in sharp focus. When operating the control with  
your eye to the viewfinder, be careful not to put  
your fingers or fingernails in your eye.  
AF area brackets  
Viewfinder not in focus  
Viewfinder in focus  
       
D Charging the Battery  
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages viii–x and 245–247 of this manual. Charge  
the battery indoors at ambient temperatures of 5 °C–35 °C (41 °F–95 °F). Do not use the  
battery at ambient temperatures below 0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F; failure to observe  
this precaution could damage the battery or impair its performance. Capacity may be  
reduced and charging times may increase at battery temperatures from 0 °C/32 °F to 15 °C/  
59 °F and from 45 °C/113 °F to 60 °C/140 °F. The battery will not charge if its temperature is  
below 0 °C (32 °F) or above 60 °C (140 °F). If the CHARGE lamp flashes quickly (about eight  
times a second) during charging, confirm that the temperature is in the correct range and  
then unplug the charger and remove and reinsert the battery. If the problem persists, cease  
use immediately and take battery and charger to your retailer or a Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in use.  
A Battery Level  
Battery level is shown in the information display (if the battery is  
low, a warning will also be displayed in the viewfinder). If the  
information display does not appear when the R button is  
pressed, the battery is exhausted and needs to be recharged.  
Information display  
Viewfinder  
Description  
L
K
Battery fully charged.  
Battery partially discharged.  
Low battery. Ready fully-charged spare battery or  
prepare to charge battery.  
H
d
H
(flashes)  
d
(flashes)  
Battery exhausted. Charge battery.  
   
A Removing the Battery  
To remove the battery, turn the camera off and open the battery-  
chamber cover. Press the battery latch in the direction shown by  
the arrow to release the battery and then remove the battery by  
hand.  
A Formatting Memory Cards  
If this is the first time the memory card will be used in the camera or  
if the card has been formatted in another device, select Format  
memory card in the setup menu and follow the on-screen  
instructions to format the card (0 196). Note that this permanently  
deletes any data the card may contain. Be sure to copy any  
photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before  
proceeding.  
A Removing Memory Cards  
After confirming that the memory card access lamp is off, turn the  
camera off, open the memory card slot cover, and press the card  
in to eject it (q). The card can then be removed by hand (w).  
GB  
16  
     
A A-M, M/A-M, A/M-M, and Vibration Reduction (VR) Switches  
When using autofocus with a lens equipped with an A-M  
mode switch, slide the switch to A (if the lens has an M/A-M or  
A/M-M switch, select M/A or A/M). For information on other  
lenses that can be used with this camera, see page 226.  
If the lens has a vibration reduction (VR) switch, select ON to  
reduce the effects of vibration (0 267).  
A Using a Zoom Lens  
Zoom in  
Use the zoom ring to zoom in on the subject so that it fills a  
larger area of the frame, or zoom out to increase the area  
visible in the final photograph (select longer focal lengths on  
the lens focal length scale to zoom in, shorter focal lengths to  
zoom out).  
Zoom ring  
Zoom out  
A Detaching the Lens  
Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging  
lenses. To remove the lens, press and hold the lens release  
button (q) while turning the lens clockwise (w). After  
removing the lens, replace the lens caps and camera body  
cap.  
A The Camera Clock  
The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks. Check the clock  
regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary.  
A The Clock Battery  
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power source, which is  
charged as necessary when the main battery is installed. Three days of charging will power  
the clock for about a month. If a message warning that the clock is not set is displayed when  
the camera is turned on, the clock battery is exhausted and the clock has been reset. Set the  
clock to the correct time and date.  
           
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes  
(i and j)  
This section describes how to shoot photographs and movies  
in i and j modes, automatic “point-and-shoot” modes in  
which the majority of settings are controlled by the camera in  
response to shooting conditions.  
Before proceeding, turn the camera on and rotate the  
mode dial to i or j (the only difference between the  
two is that the flash will not fire in j mode).  
Mode dial  
Viewfinder photography  
Taking photographs  
Viewing photographs  
Deleting photographs  
Live view  
Taking photographs  
Viewing photographs  
Deleting photographs  
Shooting movies  
Viewing movies  
Deleting movies  
   
Framing Photos in the Viewfinder  
1 Ready the camera.  
When framing photographs in the  
viewfinder, hold the handgrip in your  
right hand and cradle the camera  
body or lens with your left.  
When framing photographs in portrait (tall) orientation,  
hold the camera as shown at right.  
2 Frame the photograph.  
Frame a photograph in the viewfinder with the  
main subject in the AF area brackets.  
AF area brackets  
3 Press the shutter-release button halfway.  
Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus  
(if the subject is poorly lit, the flash may pop up  
and the AF-assist illuminator may light). When  
the focus operation is complete, a beep will  
sound (a beep may not sound if the subject is  
moving) and the active focus point and in-focus  
indicator (I) will appear in the viewfinder.  
Focus point  
In-focus indicator  
I
Description  
Subject in focus.  
Camera unable to focus using  
autofocus. See page 52.  
I (flashes)  
In-focus  
indicator  
Buffer  
capacity  
           
4 Shoot.  
Smoothly press the shutter-release button the  
rest of the way down to take the photograph.  
The memory card access lamp will light and the  
photograph will be displayed in the monitor for a  
few seconds. Do not eject the memory card or  
remove or disconnect the power source until the  
lamp has gone out and recording is complete.  
Memory card access  
lamp  
A The Shutter-Release Button  
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera focuses when the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway. To take the photograph, press the shutter-release button  
the rest of the way down.  
Focus: press halfway  
Shoot: press all the way down  
Pressing the shutter-release button halfway also ends playback and readies the camera for  
immediate use.  
       
Viewing Photographs  
Pressing K displays a picture in the monitor.  
K button  
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures.  
Deleting Unwanted Pictures  
Display the photograph you wish to delete.  
K button  
Press O; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
O button  
Press the O button again to delete the picture.  
       
A The Standby Timer  
The viewfinder and information display will turn off if no operations are performed for about  
eight seconds, reducing the drain on the battery. Press the shutter-release button halfway to  
reactivate the display. The length of time before the standby timer expires automatically can  
be selected using Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers; 0 186).  
Exposure meters on  
Exposure meters off  
Exposure meters on  
A The Built-in Flash  
If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in i mode,  
the built-in flash will pop up automatically when the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway (0 62). If the flash is raised,  
photographs can only be taken when the flash-ready indicator (M)  
is displayed. If the flash-ready indicator is not displayed, the flash  
is charging; remove your finger briefly from the shutter-release  
button and try again.  
When the flash is not in use, return it to its closed position by  
pressing it gently downward till the latch clicks into place.  
     
Framing Photos in the Monitor  
1 Rotate the live view switch.  
The view through the lens will be displayed in the  
camera monitor (live view).  
Live view switch  
2 Ready the camera.  
Hold the handgrip in your right hand  
and cradle the camera body or lens  
with your left.  
When framing photographs in portrait (tall) orientation,  
hold the camera as shown at right.  
3 Focus.  
Press the shutter-release button halfway. The  
focus point will flash green while the camera  
focuses. If the camera is able to focus, the focus  
point will be displayed in green; if the camera is  
unable to focus, the focus point will flash red.  
Focus point  
       
4 Take the picture.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the  
way down. The monitor turns off and the  
memory card access lamp lights during  
recording. Do not eject the memory card or remove  
or disconnect the power source until the lamp has  
gone out and recording is complete. When  
recording is complete, the photograph will be  
displayed in the monitor for a few seconds.  
Rotate the live view switch to exit live view.  
Memory card access lamp  
A Automatic Scene Selection (Scene Auto Selector)  
If live view is selected in i or j mode, the camera will automatically  
analyze the subject and select the appropriate shooting mode when  
autofocus is enabled. The selected mode is shown in the monitor.  
Portrait  
Landscape  
Close up  
Human portrait subjects  
Landscapes and cityscapes  
Subjects close to the camera  
c
d
e
f
Z
b
Night portrait Portrait subjects framed against a dark background  
Auto  
Auto (flash off)  
Subjects suited to i or j mode or that do not fall into the categories  
listed above  
A Live View  
For more information on taking photographs in live view, see page 118.  
 
Viewing Photographs  
Pressing K displays a picture in the monitor.  
K button  
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures.  
Deleting Unwanted Pictures  
Display the photograph you wish to delete.  
K button  
Press O; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
O button  
Press the O button again to delete the picture.  
   
Recording Movies  
Movies can be recorded in live view mode.  
1 Rotate the live view switch.  
The view through the lens is displayed in the  
monitor.  
Live view switch  
2 Ready the camera.  
Hold the handgrip in your right hand  
and cradle the camera body or lens  
with your left.  
3 Focus.  
Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus.  
Focus point  
       
4 Start recording.  
Press the movie-record button to start recording. A  
recording indicator and the time available are displayed in  
the monitor.  
Movie-record button  
Recording indicator  
Time remaining  
5 End recording.  
Press the movie-record button again to end recording.  
Rotate the live view switch to exit live view.  
Viewing Movies  
Press K to start playback and then scroll through  
pictures until a movie (indicated by a 1 icon) is  
displayed. Press J to start playback and press 1  
or K to end playback. For more information, see  
K button  
D Recording Movies  
See page 126 for more information on recording movies.  
     
Deleting Unwanted Movies  
Display the movie you wish to delete (movies are  
indicated by 1 icons).  
K button  
Press O; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
O button  
Press the O button again to delete the movie.  
 
Matching Settings to the Subject  
or Situation (Scene Mode)  
The camera offers a choice of “scene” modes. Choosing a scene mode automatically  
optimizes settings to suit the selected scene, making creative photography as simple  
as selecting a mode, framing a picture, and shooting as described on page 19.  
The scenes listed below can be selected  
with the mode dial.  
k Portrait  
l Landscape  
p Child  
m Sports  
n Close up  
The following scenes can be selected by rotating the mode dial to h and rotating the  
command dial until the desired scene appears in the monitor.  
o Night Portrait  
r Night Landscape  
s Party/Indoor  
t Beach/Snow  
u Sunset  
v Dusk/Dawn  
w Pet Portrait  
x
Candlelight  
y Blossom  
z Autumn Colors  
0 Food  
   
The Mode Dial  
The following scenes can be selected with the mode  
dial:  
Mode dial  
kPortrait  
Use for portraits with soft, natural-looking  
skin tones. If the subject is far from the  
background or a telephoto lens is used,  
background details will be softened to  
lend the composition a sense of depth.  
lLandscape  
Use for vivid landscape shots in daylight.  
A Note  
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator  
turn off.  
pChild  
Use for snapshots of children. Clothing  
and background details are vividly  
rendered, while skin tones remain soft and  
natural.  
             
mSports  
Fast shutter speeds freeze motion for  
dynamic sports shots in which the main  
subject stands out clearly.  
A Note  
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator  
turn off.  
nClose up  
Use for close-up shots of flowers, insects,  
and other small objects (a macro lens can  
be used to focus at very close ranges).  
       
Other Scenes  
The following scenes can be selected by rotating the mode dial to h and rotating  
the command dial until the desired scene appears in the monitor.  
Mode dial  
Command dial  
Monitor  
oNight Portrait  
Use for a natural balance between the  
main subject and the background in  
portraits taken under low light.  
rNight Landscape  
Reduce noise and unnatural colors when  
photographing night landscapes,  
including street lighting and neon signs.  
A Note  
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator  
turn off.  
           
sParty/Indoor  
Capture the effects of indoor background  
lighting. Use for parties and other indoor  
scenes.  
tBeach/Snow  
Capture the brightness of sunlit expanses  
of water, snow, or sand.  
A Note  
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator  
turn off.  
uSunset  
Preserves the deep hues seen in sunsets  
and sunrises.  
A Note  
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator  
turn off.  
           
vDusk/Dawn  
Preserves the colors seen in the weak  
natural light before dawn or after sunset.  
A Note  
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator  
turn off.  
wPet Portrait  
Use for portraits of active pets.  
A Note  
The AF-assist illuminator turns off.  
xCandlelight  
For photographs taken by candlelight.  
A Note  
The built-in flash turns off.  
           
yBlossom  
zAutumn Colors  
0Food  
Use for fields of flowers, orchards in  
bloom, and other landscapes featuring  
expanses of blossoms.  
A Note  
The built-in flash turns off.  
Captures the brilliant reds and yellows in  
autumn leaves.  
A Note  
The built-in flash turns off.  
Use for vivid photographs of food.  
A Note  
For flash photography, press the M (Y)  
button to raise the flash (0 64).  
A Preventing Blur  
Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter speeds.  
           
Special Effects  
Special effects can be used when recording images.  
% Night Vision  
g Color Sketch  
1 Silhouette  
2 High Key  
' Toy Camera Effect  
( Miniature Effect  
3 Selective Color  
3 Low Key  
) HDR Painting  
The following effects can be selected by rotating the mode dial to q and rotating  
the command dial until the desired option appears in the monitor.  
Mode dial  
Command dial  
Monitor  
%Night Vision  
Use under conditions of darkness to  
record monochrome images at high ISO  
sensitivities.  
A Note  
Pictures may be affected by noise in the  
form of randomly-spaced bright pixels,  
fog, or lines. Autofocus is available in live  
view only; manual focus can be used if the  
camera is unable to focus. The built-in  
flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.  
         
gColor Sketch  
The camera detects and colors outlines for  
a color sketch effect. The effect can be  
adjusted in live view (0 41).  
A Note  
Movies shot in this mode play back like a  
slide show made up of a series of stills.  
'Toy Camera Effect  
Create photos and movies that appear to  
have been shot with a toy camera. The  
effect can be adjusted in live view (0 42).  
(Miniature Effect  
Create photos that appear to be pictures  
of dioramas. Works best when shooting  
from a high vantage point. Miniature  
effect movies play back at high speed,  
compressing about 45 minutes of footage  
shot at 1920 × 1080/30p into a movie that  
plays back in about three minutes. The  
effect can be adjusted in live view (0 42).  
A Note  
Sound is not recorded with movies. The  
built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn  
off.  
           
3Selective Color  
1Silhouette  
2High Key  
All colors other than the selected colors  
are recorded in black and white. The effect  
can be adjusted in live view (0 43).  
A Note  
The built-in flash turns off.  
Silhouette subjects against bright  
backgrounds.  
A Note  
The built-in flash turns off.  
Use with bright scenes to create bright  
images that seem filled with light.  
A Note  
The built-in flash turns off.  
           
3Low Key  
Use with dark scenes to create dark,  
somber images with prominent  
highlights.  
A Note  
The built-in flash turns off.  
)HDR Painting  
Each time a photo is taken, the camera  
shoots two frames at different exposures  
and combines them for a painterly effect  
that emphasizes detail and color.  
A Note  
The effect can not be previewed in live  
view. Note that the desired results may  
not be achieved if the camera or subject  
move during shooting. During recording,  
a message is displayed and no further  
photos can be taken. The built-in flash  
turns off, continuous shooting is disabled,  
and movies are recorded in j mode.  
A NEF (RAW)  
NEF (RAW) recording is not available in %, g, ', (, 3, and ) modes. Pictures taken when  
an NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG option is selected in these modes will be recorded as JPEG  
images. JPEG images created at settings of NEF (RAW)+JPEG will be recorded at the selected  
JPEG quality, while images recorded at a setting of NEF (RAW) will be recorded as fine-quality  
images.  
A g and ( Modes  
Autofocus is not available during movie recording. The live view refresh rate will drop,  
together with the frame rate for continuous release modes; using autofocus during live view  
photography will disrupt the preview.  
A Preventing Blur  
Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter speeds.  
       
Options Available in Live View  
gColor Sketch  
1 Select live view.  
Rotate the live view switch. The view through the lens will  
be displayed in the monitor.  
Live view switch  
2 Adjust options.  
Press J to display the options shown at right.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight Vividness or Outlines  
and press 4 or 2 to change. Vividness can be  
increased to make colors more saturated, or  
decreased for a washed-out, monochromatic  
effect, while outlines can be made thicker or  
thinner. Increasing the thickness of the lines also  
makes colors more saturated.  
3 Press J.  
Press J to exit when settings are complete. To exit live view, rotate the live  
view switch. The selected settings will continue in effect and will apply to  
photographs taken using the viewfinder.  
     
'Toy Camera Effect  
1 Select live view.  
Rotate the live view switch. The view through the lens will  
be displayed in the monitor.  
Live view switch  
2 Adjust options.  
Press J to display the options shown at right.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight Vividness or  
Vignetting and press 4 or 2 to change. Adjust  
vividness to make colors more or less saturated,  
vignetting to control the amount of vignetting.  
3 Press J.  
Press J to exit when settings are complete. To exit live view, rotate the live  
view switch. The selected settings will continue in effect and will apply to  
photographs taken using the viewfinder.  
(Miniature Effect  
1 Select live view.  
Rotate the live view switch. The view through the lens will  
be displayed in the monitor.  
Live view switch  
       
2 Position the focus point.  
Use the multi selector to position the focus point  
in the area that will be in focus and then press the  
shutter-release button halfway to focus. To  
temporarily clear miniature effect options from  
the display and enlarge the view in the monitor  
for precise focus, press X. Press W (Q) to rsestore  
the miniature effect display.  
3 Display options.  
Press J to display miniature effect options.  
4 Adjust options.  
Press 4 or 2 to choose the orientation of the area  
that will be in focus and press 1 or 3 to adjust its  
width.  
5 Return to the live view display.  
Press J to return to live view. To exit live view, rotate the live view switch. The  
selected settings will continue in effect and will apply to photographs taken  
using the viewfinder.  
3Selective Color  
1 Select live view.  
Rotate the live view switch. The view through the lens will  
be displayed in the monitor.  
Live view switch  
2 Display options.  
Press J to display selective color options.  
   
Selected color  
3 Select a color.  
Frame an object in the white square in the center  
of the display and press 1 to choose the color of  
the object as one that will remain in the final  
image (the camera may have difficulty detecting  
unsaturated colors; choose a saturated color). To  
zoom in on the center of the display for more  
precise color selection, press X. Press W (Q) to  
zoom out.  
Color range  
4 Choose the color range.  
Press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease the range of  
similar hues that will be included in the final  
image. Choose from values between 1 and 7;  
note that higher values may include hues from  
other colors.  
5 Select additional colors.  
To select additional colors, rotate the command  
dial to highlight another of the three color boxes  
at the top of the display and repeat Steps 3 and 4  
to select another color. Repeat for a third color if  
desired. To deselect the highlighted color, press  
O (To remove all colors, press and hold O. A  
confirmation dialog will be displayed; select Yes).  
6 Return to the live view display.  
Press J to return to live view. During shooting, only objects of the selected  
hues will be recorded in color; all others will be recorded in black-and-white. To  
exit live view, rotate the live view switch. The selected settings will continue in  
effect and will apply to photographs taken using the viewfinder.  
More on Photography  
Choosing a Release Mode  
To choose how the shutter is released (release  
mode), press the s (E/#) button, then highlight  
the desired option and press J.  
s (E/#) button  
Mode  
Description  
Single frame: Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release button is pressed.  
8
Continuous L: The camera takes photographs at a slow rate while the shutter-release  
button is pressed (0 46).  
!
Continuous H: The camera takes photographs at a fast rate while the shutter-release  
button is pressed (0 46).  
9
Quiet shutter release: As for single-frame, except that camera noise is reduced (0 48).  
J
E
Self-timer: Take pictures with the self-timer (0 49).  
Delayed remote (ML-L3): Shutter is released 2 s after shutter-release button on optional  
ML-L3 remote control is pressed (0 70).  
Quick-response remote (ML-L3): Shutter is released when shutter-release button on optional  
ML-L3 remote control is pressed (0 70).  
"
#
                   
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)  
In ! (Continuous L) and 9 (Continuous H) modes, the camera takes  
photographs continuously while the shutter-release button is pressed all the way  
down.  
1 Press the s (E/#) button.  
s (E/#) button  
2 Choose a continuous release mode.  
Highlight ! (Continuous L) or 9  
(Continuous H) and press J.  
3 Focus.  
Frame the shot and focus.  
4 Take photographs.  
The camera will take photographs while the  
shutter-release button is pressed all the way  
down.  
       
A The Memory Buffer  
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage, allowing shooting to  
continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card. Up to 100 photographs  
can be taken in succession. Depending on the battery level and the number of images in the  
buffer, recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes. If the battery is exhausted  
while images remain in the buffer, the shutter release will be disabled and the images  
transferred to the memory card.  
A Frame Rate  
For information on the number of photographs can be taken in continuous release modes,  
see page 260. Frame rates may drop when the memory buffer is full or the battery is low.  
A The Built-in Flash  
Continuous release modes can not be used with the built-in flash; rotate the mode dial to j  
(0 19) or turn the flash off (0 62).  
A Buffer Size  
The approximate number of images that can be stored in the  
memory buffer at current settings is shown in the viewfinder  
exposure-count display while the shutter-release button is pressed.  
     
Quiet Shutter Release  
Choose this mode to keep camera noise to a minimum. A beep does not sound when  
the camera focuses.  
1 Press the s (E/#) button.  
s (E/#) button  
2 Select J (Quiet shutter release).  
Highlight J (Quiet shutter release) and press  
J.  
3 Press the shutter-release button all the way  
down.  
Press the shutter-release button all the way down  
to shoot.  
   
Self-Timer Mode  
The self-timer can be used for self-portraits or group shots that include the  
photographer. Before proceeding, mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a  
stable, level surface.  
1 Press the s (E/#) button.  
s (E/#) button  
2 Select E (Self-timer) mode.  
Highlight E (Self-timer) and press J.  
3 Frame the photograph.  
4 Take the photograph.  
Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus,  
and then press the button the rest of the way  
down. The self-timer lamp will start to flash and a  
beep will begin to sound. Two seconds before  
the photo is taken, the lamp will stop flashing and  
the beeping will become more rapid. The shutter will be released ten seconds  
after the timer starts.  
Note that the timer may not start or a photograph may not be taken if the camera is  
unable to focus or in other situations in which the shutter can not be released. To  
stop the timer without taking a photograph, turn the camera off.  
     
A Cover the Viewfinder  
When taking photos without your eye to the  
viewfinder, remove the rubber eyecup (q) and  
insert the supplied eyepiece cap as shown (w).  
This prevents light entering via the viewfinder  
interfering with exposure.  
Rubber eyecup  
Eyepiece cap  
q
w
A Using the Built-in Flash  
Before taking a photograph with the flash in modes that require the flash to be raised  
manually, press the M (Y) button to raise the flash and wait for the M indicator to be  
displayed in the viewfinder (0 23). Shooting will be interrupted if the flash is raised after the  
self-timer has started.  
A Custom Setting c3 (Self-Timer)  
For information on choosing the duration of the self-timer and the number of shots taken,  
see Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer; 0 187).  
     
Focus (Viewfinder Photography)  
This section describes the focus options available when photographs are framed in  
the viewfinder. Focus can be adjusted automatically or manually (see “Focus Mode,”  
below). The user can also select the focus point for automatic or manual focus (0 55)  
or use focus lock to focus to recompose photographs after focusing (0 55).  
Choosing How the Camera Focuses: Focus Mode  
Choose from the following focus modes. Note that AF-S and AF-C are available only in  
modes P, S, A, and M.  
Option  
Description  
Camera automatically selects single-servo autofocus if subject is  
stationary, continuous-servo autofocus if subject is moving. Shutter can  
only be released if camera is able to focus.  
Auto-servo  
AF  
AF-A  
AF-S  
AF-C  
Single-servo For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutter-release button is  
AF  
pressed halfway. Shutter can only be released if camera is able to focus.  
For moving subjects. Camera focuses continuously while shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway. At default settings, shutter can only  
be released if camera is able to focus (0 184).  
Continuous-  
servo AF  
MF Manual focus Focus manually (0 57).  
1 Display focus mode options.  
Press the P button, then highlight the  
current focus mode in the information  
display and press J.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Choose a focus mode.  
Highlight a focus mode and press J.  
                   
A Predictive Focus Tracking  
In AF-C mode or when continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A mode, the camera will  
initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward the camera while the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway. This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to  
predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released.  
D Continuous-Servo Autofocus  
When Focus is selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection; 0 184) and the  
camera is in AF-C mode or continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A mode, the camera  
gives higher priority to focus response (has a wider focus range) than in AF-S mode, and the  
shutter may be released before the in-focus indicator is displayed.  
A Getting Good Results with Autofocus  
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below. The shutter release may  
be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator  
(I) may be displayed and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released  
even when the subject is not in focus. In these cases, focus manually (0 57) or use focus lock  
(0 55) to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the  
photograph.  
There is little or no contrast  
between the subject and the  
background.  
The focus point contains  
areas of sharply contrasting  
brightness.  
Example: Subject is the same  
color as the background.  
The focus point contains  
objects at different distances  
from the camera.  
Example: Subject is half in  
the shade.  
Background objects appear  
larger than the subject.  
Example: A building is in the  
frame behind the subject.  
Example: Subject is inside a  
cage.  
The subject contains many  
The subject is dominated by  
fine details.  
regular geometric patterns.  
Example: A field of flowers or  
other subjects that are  
small or lack variation in  
brightness.  
Example: Blinds or a row of  
windows in a skyscraper.  
A The AF-Assist Illuminator  
If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator will light  
automatically to assist the autofocus operation when the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway (some restrictions apply; 0 252).  
Note that the illuminator may become hot when used multiple  
times in quick succession and will turn off automatically to protect  
the lamp after a period of continuous use. Normal function will  
resume after a brief pause.  
AF-assist illuminator  
     
Choosing How the Focus Point Is Selected:  
AF-Area Mode  
Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected. Note that d (dynamic-area)  
and f (3D-tracking) AF-area modes are not available when AF-S is selected for focus  
mode.  
Option  
Description  
For stationary subjects. Focus point is selected manually; camera  
focuses on subject in selected focus point only.  
c
Single-point AF  
For non-stationary subjects. In AF-A and AF-C focus modes, user selects  
focus point using multi selector (0 55), but camera will focus based  
on information from surrounding focus points if subject briefly  
leaves selected point. Number of focus points varies with mode  
selected:  
Dynamic-area AF  
(9 points)  
J
Dynamic-area AF  
(21 points)  
9-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when there is time to compose  
photograph or when photographing subjects that are moving  
predictably (e.g., runners or race cars on a track).  
K
L
21-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects that  
are moving unpredictably (e.g., players at a football game).  
39-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects that  
are moving quickly and are hard to keep in frame (e.g., birds).  
Dynamic-area AF  
(39 points)  
Quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving erratically  
from side to side (e.g., tennis players). In AF-A and AF-C focus modes, user  
selects focus point using multi selector (0 55). If subject moves  
after camera has focused, camera uses 3D-tracking to select new  
focus point and keep focus locked on original subject while shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway.  
f
e
3D-tracking  
Auto-area AF  
Camera automatically detects subject and selects focus point.  
1 Display AF-area mode options.  
Press the P button, then highlight the  
current AF-area mode in the information  
display and press J.  
P button  
Information display  
             
2 Choose an AF-area mode.  
Highlight an option and press J.  
A AF-Area Mode  
AF-area mode selections made in shooting modes other than P, S, A, or M are reset when  
another shooting mode is selected.  
A 3D-Tracking  
If subject leaves the viewfinder, remove your finger from the shutter-release button and  
recompose the photograph with the subject in the selected focus point. Note that when the  
shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the area surrounding the focus point  
are stored in the camera. Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the desired results  
with subjects that are the same color as the background.  
 
Focus Point Selection  
In manual focus mode or when autofocus is combined with AF-area modes other  
than e (Auto-area AF), you can choose from 39 focus points, making it possible to  
compose photographs with the main subject almost anywhere in the frame.  
1 Choose an AF-area mode other than e  
(Auto-area AF; 0 53).  
2 Select the focus point.  
Use the multi selector to select the focus point in  
the viewfinder or information display while the  
exposure meters are on. Press J to select the  
center focus point.  
Focus point  
Focus Lock  
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing in AF-A, AF-S, and AF-C  
focus modes (0 51), making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a  
focus point in the final composition. If the camera is unable to focus using autofocus  
(0 52), focus lock can also be used to recompose the photograph after focusing on  
another object at the same distance as your original subject. Focus lock is most  
effective when an option other than e (Auto-area AF) is selected for AF-area mode  
(0 53).  
1 Focus.  
Position the subject in the selected focus point  
and press the shutter-release button halfway to  
initiate focus. Check that the in-focus indicator  
(I) appears in the viewfinder.  
           
2 Lock focus.  
AF-A and AF-C focus modes: With the shutter-release  
button pressed halfway (q), press the A (L)  
button (w) to lock focus. Focus will remain  
locked while the A (L) button is pressed, even if  
you later remove your finger from the shutter-  
release button.  
Shutter-release button  
A (L) button  
AF-S focus mode: Focus will lock automatically when the in-focus indicator  
appears, and remain locked until you remove your finger from the shutter-  
release button. Focus can also be locked by pressing the A (L) button (see  
above).  
3 Recompose the photograph and shoot.  
Focus will remain locked between shots if you  
keep the shutter-release button pressed halfway  
(AF-S) or keep the A (L) button pressed,  
allowing several photographs in succession to be  
taken at the same focus setting.  
Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus  
lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus again at the new distance.  
A Autoexposure Lock  
Pressing the A (L) button in Step 2 also locks exposure (0 91).  
     
Manual Focus  
Manual focus can be used when autofocus is not available or does not produce the  
desired results (0 52).  
A-M  
M/A-M  
1 Set the lens focus-mode switch.  
If the lens is equipped with an A-M, M/A-M, or A/M-M  
mode switch, slide the switch to M.  
mode switch mode switch  
2 Focus.  
To focus manually, adjust the lens focus ring until the  
image displayed on the clear matte field in the viewfinder  
is in focus. Photographs can be taken at any time, even  
when the image is not in focus.  
The Electronic Rangefinder  
If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster, the  
viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether the  
subject in the selected focus point is in focus (the focus point  
can be selected from any of the 39 focus points). After  
positioning the subject in the selected focus point, press the  
shutter-release button halfway and rotate the lens focus ring  
until the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed. Note that with the subjects listed on  
page 52, the in-focus indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not  
in focus; confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting.  
             
A Selecting Manual Focus with the Camera  
If the lens supports M/A (autofocus with manual override) or A/M  
(autofocus with manual override/AF priority), manual focus can also  
be selected by setting the camera focus mode to MF (manual focus;  
0 51). Focus can then be adjusted manually, regardless of the mode  
selected with the lens.  
A Focal Plane Position  
The position of the focal plane is indicated by the focal plane  
mark on the camera body. The distance between the lens  
mounting flange and the focal plane is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.).  
46.5mm  
Focal plane mark  
   
Image Quality and Size  
Together, image quality and size determine how much space each photograph  
occupies on the memory card. Larger, higher quality images can be printed at larger  
sizes but also require more memory, meaning that fewer such images can be stored  
on the memory card (0 272).  
Image Quality  
Choose a file format and compression ratio (image quality).  
Option File type  
NEF (RAW) +  
JPEG fine  
Description  
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one fine-quality JPEG  
image.  
NEF (RAW) + NEF/ Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-quality  
JPEG normal JPEG JPEG image.  
NEF (RAW) +  
JPEG basic  
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-quality  
JPEG image.  
Raw data from the image sensor are saved directly to the memory card.  
NEF Settings such as white balance and contrast can be adjusted after  
shooting.  
NEF (RAW)  
JPEG fine  
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 4 (fine quality).  
JPEG normal JPEG Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 8 (normal quality).  
JPEG basic Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 16 (basic quality).  
1 Display image quality options.  
Press the P button, then highlight the  
current image quality in the information  
display and press J.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Choose a file type.  
Highlight an option and press J.  
               
A NEF (RAW) Images  
Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF (RAW) images.  
White balance bracketing (0 108), high dynamic range (HDR, 0 96), and print date (0 190)  
are not available at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG.  
NEF (RAW) images can be viewed on the camera or using software such as Capture NX 2  
(available separately; 0 236) or ViewNX 2 (supplied). JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images can  
be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu (0 213).  
A NEF (RAW) + JPEG  
When photographs taken at NEF (RAW) + JPEG are viewed on the camera, only the JPEG  
image will be displayed. When photographs taken at these settings are deleted, both NEF  
and JPEG images will be deleted.  
   
Image Size  
Choose a size for JPEG images:  
Image size  
Size (pixels)  
6000 × 4000  
4496 × 3000  
2992 × 2000  
Print size (cm/in.) *  
50.8 × 33.9/20 × 13.3  
38.1 × 25.4/15.0 × 10  
25.3 × 16.9/10 × 6.7  
#
$
%
Large  
Medium  
Small  
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels  
divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch=approximately 2.54 cm).  
1 Display image size options.  
Press the P button, then highlight the  
current image size in the information display  
and press J.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Choose an image size.  
Highlight an option and press J.  
         
Using the Built-in Flash  
The camera supports a variety of flash modes for photographing poorly lit or backlit  
subjects.  
Auto Pop-up Modes  
In i, k, p, n, o, s, w, g , and ' modes, the built-in flash automatically pops up and  
fires as required.  
1 Choose a flash mode.  
Keeping the M (Y)  
button pressed, rotate  
+
the command dial until  
the desired flash mode  
appears in the  
M (Y) button  
Command  
dial  
Information display  
information display.  
2 Take pictures.  
The flash will pop up as required when the  
shutter-release button is pressed halfway, and  
fire when a photograph is taken. If the flash does  
not pop up automatically, DO NOT attempt to raise it  
by hand. Failure to observe this precaution could  
damage the flash.  
         
Flash Modes  
The following flash modes are available:  
No (auto flash): When lighting is poor or the subject is backlit, the flash pops  
up automatically when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway and fires as  
required. Not available in o mode.  
Njo (auto with red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. The flash pops up and  
fires as required, but before it fires the red-eye reduction lamp lights to help reduce  
“red-eye.Not available in o mode.  
j (off): The flash does not fire.  
Njr (auto slow sync with red-eye reduction): As for auto with red-eye  
reduction, except that slow shutter speeds are used to capture background  
lighting. Use for portraits taken at night or under low light. Available in o mode.  
Nr (auto slow sync): Slow shutter speeds are used to capture background  
lighting in shots taken at night or under low light. Available in o mode.  
A The Information Display  
Flash mode can also be selected in the information display.  
         
Manual Pop-up Modes  
In P, S, A, M, and 0 modes, the flash must be raised manually. The flash will not fire if it  
is not raised.  
1 Raise the flash.  
Press the M (Y) button to raise the flash.  
M (Y) button  
2 Choose a flash mode (P, S, A, and M modes only).  
Keeping the M (Y)  
button pressed, rotate  
+
the command dial until  
the desired flash mode  
appears in the  
M (Y) button  
Command  
dial  
Information display  
information display.  
3 Take pictures.  
The flash will fire whenever a picture is taken.  
     
Flash Modes  
The following flash modes are available:  
N (fill flash): The flash fires with every shot.  
Nj (red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. The flash fires with every shot, but  
before it fires, the red-eye reduction lamp lights to help reduce “red-eye. Not  
available in 0 mode.  
Njp (red-eye reduction with slow sync): As for “red-eye reduction, above,  
except that shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at  
night or under low light. Use when you want to include background lighting in  
portraits. Not available in modes S, M, and 0.  
Np (slow sync): As for “fill flash, above, except that shutter speed slows  
automatically to capture background lighting at night or under low light. Use  
when you want to capture both subject and background. Not available in modes  
S, M, and 0.  
Nt (slow rear-curtain sync): As for “rear-curtain sync, below, except that  
shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night or  
under low light. Use when you want to capture both subject and background. Not  
available in modes S, M, and 0.  
Nq (rear-curtain sync): The flash fires just before the shutter closes, creating a  
stream of light behind moving light sources as shown below at right. Not available  
in modes P, A, and 0.  
Front-curtain sync  
Rear-curtain sync  
         
A Lowering the Built-in Flash  
To save power when the flash is not in use, press it gently downward  
until the latch clicks into place.  
A The Built-in Flash  
For information on the lenses that can be used with the built-in flash, see page 230. Remove  
lens hoods to prevent shadows. The flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft) and can not  
be used in the macro range of zoom lenses with a macro function.  
The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has been used for  
several consecutive shots. The flash can be used again after a short pause.  
A Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash  
Shutter speed is restricted to the following ranges when the built-in flash is used:  
Mode  
Shutter speed  
1/2001/60 s  
1/200–1 s  
Mode  
S
M
Shutter speed  
1/200–30 s  
1/200–30 s, Bulb, Time  
i, k, p, n, s, w, 0, g,  
', P, A  
o
Shutter speeds as slow as 1/30 s are available in mode k when vibration reduction (0 267)  
is on. Shutter speeds as slow as 30 s are available in modes P and A when slow sync, rear  
curtain + slow sync, or slow sync + red-eye reduction is selected (0 65).  
A Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range  
Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.  
Aperture at ISO equivalent of  
Approximate range  
ft  
100  
1.4  
2
2.8  
4
5.6  
8
11  
16  
200  
2
2.8  
4
5.6  
8
11  
16  
22  
400  
2.8  
4
800 1600 3200 6400 12800  
m
4
5.6  
8
8
11  
16  
22  
32  
16  
22  
32  
1.0–8.5  
0.7–6.0  
0.6–4.2  
0.6–3.0  
0.6–2.1  
0.6–1.5  
0.6–1.1  
0.6–0.7  
3ft 3in.–27ft 11n.  
2ft 4in.–19ft 8in.  
2ft–13ft 9in.  
2ft–9ft 10in.  
2ft–6ft 11in.  
2ft–4ft 11in.  
2ft–3ft 7in.  
5.6  
8
11  
16  
22  
32  
5.6  
8
11  
16  
22  
32  
11  
16  
22  
32  
11  
16  
22  
32  
2ft–2ft 4in.  
   
ISO Sensitivity  
The camera’s sensitivity to light can be adjusted according to the amount of light  
available. The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure,  
allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures. Noise (randomly-spaced bright  
pixels, fog, or lines) is however more likely at settings between Hi 0.3 (equivalent to  
ISO 16000) and Hi 1 (equivalent to ISO 25600). Choosing Auto allows the camera to  
set ISO sensitivity automatically in response to lighting conditions; to use auto in P, S,  
A, and M modes, select Auto ISO sensitivity control for the ISO sensitivity settings  
item in the shooting menu (0 181).  
Mode  
ISO sensitivity  
i, j, %  
P, S, A, M  
Auto  
100–12800 in steps of 1/3 EV; Hi 0.3, Hi 0.7, Hi 1  
Other shooting modes Auto; 100–12800 in steps of 1/3 EV; Hi 0.3, Hi 0.7, Hi 1  
1 Display ISO sensitivity options.  
Press the P button, then highlight the  
current ISO sensitivity in the information  
display and press J.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Choose an ISO sensitivity.  
Highlight an option and press J.  
       
Interval Timer Photography  
The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals.  
D Before Shooting  
Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at current settings and view  
the results in the monitor. To ensure that shooting starts at the desired time, check that the  
camera clock is set correctly (0 201).  
Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins. To  
ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the battery is fully charged.  
1 Select Interval timer shooting.  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
Highlight Interval timer shooting in the  
shooting menu and press 2.  
G button  
2 Choose a starting time.  
Choose from the following starting triggers.  
To start shooting immediately, highlight Now  
and press 2. Shooting begins about three  
seconds after settings are completed;  
proceed to Step 3.  
To choose a starting time, highlight Start time  
and press 2 to display the start time  
options shown at right. Press 4 or 2 to  
highlight hours or minutes and press 1 or  
3 to change. Press 2 to continue.  
3 Choose the interval.  
Press 4 or 2 to highlight hours, minutes, or  
seconds and press 1 or 3 to choose an  
interval longer than the slowest anticipated  
shutter speed. Press 2 to continue.  
   
4 Choose the number of intervals.  
Press 4 or 2 to highlight number of  
intervals (i.e., the number of times the  
camera shoots); press 1 or 3 to change.  
Press 2 to continue.  
5 Start shooting.  
Highlight On and press J (to return to the  
shooting menu without starting the interval  
timer, highlight Off and press J). The first  
series of shots will be taken at the specified  
starting time, or after about 3 s if Now was selected for Choose start time in  
Step 2. Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been  
taken; while shooting is in progress, the memory card access lamp will flash at  
regular intervals. Note that because shutter speed and the time needed to  
record the image to the memory card may vary from shot to shot, intervals may  
be skipped if the camera is still in the process of recording the previous interval.  
If shooting can not proceed at current settings (for example, if a shutter speed  
of “Bulb” or “Time” is currently selected in shooting mode M or the start time is  
in less than a minute), a warning will be displayed in the monitor.  
A Cover the Viewfinder  
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure, remove the rubber  
eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap (0 50).  
A Other Settings  
Settings can not be adjusted during interval timer photography. Regardless of the release  
mode selected, the camera takes one photograph at each interval; in mode J, camera noise  
will be reduced. Bracketing (0 108), multiple exposure (0 98), and high dynamic range  
A Interrupting Interval Timer Photography  
To interrupt interval timer shooting, turn the camera off or rotate the mode dial to a new  
setting. Returning the monitor to the storage position does not interrupt interval timer  
shooting.  
Remote Control Photography  
Using an Optional ML-L3 Remote Control  
The optional ML-L3 remote control (0 237) can be used to reduce camera shake or  
for self-portraits. Before proceeding, mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a  
stable, level surface.  
1 Press the s (E/#) button.  
s (E/#) button  
2 Select a remote control mode.  
Highlight " (Delayed remote (ML-L3)) or  
# (Quick-response remote (ML-L3)) and  
press J.  
3 Frame the photograph.  
Check focus by pressing the shutter-release  
button halfway.  
4 Take the photograph.  
From a distance of 5 m (16 ft) or less, aim the  
transmitter on the ML-L3 at either of the  
infrared receivers on the camera (0 1, 2) and  
press the ML-L3 shutter-release button. In  
delayed remote mode, the self-timer lamp will  
light for about two seconds before the  
shutter is released. In quick-response remote  
mode, the self-timer lamp will flash after the  
shutter has been released.  
Note that the timer may not start or a photograph may not be taken if the camera is  
unable to focus or in other situations in which the shutter can not be released.  
         
A Before Using the ML-L3 Remote Control  
Before using the ML-L3 for the first time, remove the clear plastic battery-insulator sheet.  
A Cover the Viewfinder  
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure, remove the rubber  
eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap (0 50).  
A The Camera Shutter-Release Button/Other Remote Control Devices  
If an ML-L3 remote release mode is selected and the shutter is released by any means other  
than an ML-L3 remote control (for example, the camera shutter-release button or the shutter  
button on an optional remote cord or wireless remote controller), the camera will function in  
single-frame release mode.  
A Exiting Remote Control Mode  
Remote control mode is cancelled automatically if no photograph is taken before the time  
selected for Custom Setting c4 (Remote on duration (ML-L3), 0 187). Remote control  
mode will also be cancelled if the camera is turned off, a two-button reset is performed  
(0 72), or shooting options are reset using Reset shooting menu.  
A Using the Built-in Flash  
Before taking a photograph with the flash in manual pop-up modes (0 64), press the M (Y)  
button to raise the flash and wait for the M indicator to be displayed in the viewfinder (0 23).  
Shooting will be interrupted if the flash is raised after the shutter-release button on the  
ML-L3 is pressed. If the flash is required, the camera will only respond to the ML-L3 shutter-  
release button once the flash has charged. In auto pop-up modes, the flash will begin  
charging when a remote control mode is selected; once the flash is charged, it will  
automatically pop up and fire when required.  
A Wireless Remote Controllers  
Remote control is also available with various combinations of WR-R10, WR-T10, and WR-1  
wireless remote controllers (0 237), when the shutter-release buttons on the wireless  
remote controllers perform the same functions as the camera shutter-release button. For  
more information, see the manual provided with the remote controllers.  
 
Restoring Default Settings  
The camera settings listed below and on page 73 can be  
restored to default values by holding the G and P  
buttons down together for more than two seconds  
(these buttons are marked by a green dot). The  
information display turns off briefly while settings are  
reset.  
G button  
P button  
Settings Accessible from the Information Display  
Option  
Default  
0
Option  
Default  
0
Image quality  
JPEG normal 59 AF-area mode  
Image size  
Auto bracketing  
P, S, A, M  
HDR (high dynamic range)  
P, S, A, M  
Large  
Off  
Viewfinder  
n, x, 0, 1, 2, 3  
Single-point AF  
Dynamic-area AF  
(39 points)  
m, w  
i, j, k, l, p, o, r, s,  
Off  
t, u, v, y, z, g, ', 3, ), Auto-area AF  
P, S, A, M  
Live view/movie  
Active D-Lighting  
P, S, A, M  
White balance  
P, S, A, M  
ISO sensitivity  
P, S, A, M  
k, l, p, m, n, o, r, s, t,  
u, v, w, x, y, z, 0, g, ',  
(, 3, 1, 2, 3, )  
Picture Control settings  
P, S, A, M  
Focus mode  
Viewfinder  
Shooting modes other  
than %  
Live view/movie  
Auto  
Auto  
100  
k, l, p, o, s, t, u, v, x,  
y, z  
Face-priority AF  
m, r, w, %, g, ', 3, 1,  
2, 3, ), P, S, A, M  
Wide-area AF  
n, 0  
Normal-area AF  
Auto  
Metering  
P, S, A, M  
Flash mode  
i, k, p, n, w, g, '  
o
Matrix metering 90  
Auto  
Unmodified * 111  
Auto slow sync  
Auto+red-eye  
s
AF-A  
AF-S  
reduction  
P, S, A, M  
Fill flash  
Flash compensation  
P, S, A, M  
Exposure compensation  
%, P, S, A, M  
Off  
Off  
* Current Picture Control only.  
   
Other Settings  
Option  
Release mode  
m, w  
Other shooting modes  
Focus point  
AE/AF lock hold  
Shooting modes other  
than i and j  
Flexible program  
P
Multiple exposure  
Multiple exposure mode  
P, S, A, M  
Default  
0
Option  
Special effects mode  
g
Default  
0
Continuous H  
Single frame  
Center  
Vividness  
Outlines  
'
0
0
Vividness  
Vignetting  
(
0
0
Off  
Off  
Orientation  
Width  
Landscape  
Normal  
3
Off  
Color  
Off  
3
Color range  
 
Location Data  
Embedding Location Data in Photos and Movies  
The built-in location data unit can record information on the camera’s current  
position (latitude, longitude, altitude) and the current time (UTC) as provided by  
satellite navigation systems and embed it in photographs and movies taken with the  
camera. The location data function works best in locations that offer an  
unobstructed view of the sky.  
1 Select Location data.  
Press the G button to display the menus,  
then highlight Location data in the setup  
menu and press 2.  
G button  
2 Select Record location data.  
Highlight Record location data and press  
2.  
3 Select On.  
Highlight On and press J to enable the  
camera’s built-in location data unit. The  
camera will begin receiving location data  
from navigation satellites.  
A Before Enabling the Location Data Function  
Before using the location data function, read the warnings on pages viii to xv and make sure  
that the clock is set to the correct time and date as described on page 201. To prevent the  
camera turning off unexpectedly, make sure the battery is charged.  
         
4 Check satellite signal strength.  
Press the R button and check satellite signal  
strength in the information display.  
R button  
5 Take pictures.  
The location data obtained via the navigation satellite system will be recorded  
with each photograph or movie taken and can be viewed in the playback photo  
info displays (0 136) or plotted on a map using the supplied ViewNX 2 software  
6 Turn the location data function off.  
To turn the location data function off when it  
is no longer needed, select Off for Location  
data > Record location data in the setup  
menu.  
A The Satellite Signal Indicator  
Signal strength is shown in the location data display as follows:  
# (static): Camera records latitude, longitude, and altitude.  
$ (static): Camera records latitude and longitude only; altitude is  
not recorded.  
% (flashing): Location not recorded.  
   
Track Logs  
The built in location data unit can log information on the camera’s current position  
(latitude, longitude, altitude) and the current time (UTC) as provided by satellite  
navigation systems. Location data are recorded automatically at preset intervals and  
saved to a track log file stored separately from the pictures taken with the camera.  
The supplied ViewNX 2 software (0 154) can then be used to view the track on a  
map.  
1 Select On for Record location Data.  
Press the G button to display the menus  
and select Location data > Record location  
data in the setup menu. Highlight On and  
press J.  
G button  
2 Select Create log.  
Highlight Create log and press 2.  
3 Choose the log interval and log length.  
Highlight Log interval (s) and press 4 or 2  
to choose how often the camera logs  
location data (the log interval, in seconds),  
then highlight Log length (h) and press 4 or  
2 to choose how long (in hours) the log will  
continue.  
4 Start the log.  
Highlight Log location data and press 2,  
then highlight Start and press J. Location  
data will be logged at the interval and for the  
period chosen in Step 3. The time remaining  
is shown in the Location data display. Note  
that location data will be logged even when  
the standby timer has expired or the camera  
is off, increasing the drain on the battery.  
   
5 End the log.  
To end the log and save it to the memory  
card before the selected log length is  
reached, select Location data > Create log  
> Log location data, then highlight End and  
press J. The memory card access lamp will  
light while the camera saves the log to the  
memory card; do not remove the battery or  
memory card while the access lamp is lit.  
A Pausing Logs  
To pause the log, select Pause in the Create log display. The log can  
be resumed by selecting Restart.  
A Logging Location Data  
When tracking is active, the camera continues to monitor satellite signals even when off. To  
prevent logs being interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully charged before enabling  
the tracking function.  
A The Track Log Display  
While tracking is active, the indicator at right appears in the  
information display.  
A Viewing Log Dates  
Selecting Log list for Location data displays a list of the dates on  
which logs were recorded. In the case of dates with multiple logs, the  
individual logs are identified by number.  
 
Deleting Logs  
Follow the steps below to delete all or selected logs.  
1 Select Log list.  
Select Location data in the setup menu,  
then highlight Log list and press J.  
2 Press O.  
The dialog shown at right will be displayed.  
O button  
3 Select logs.  
To delete selected logs, highlight items in the list  
and press 2 to select or deselect, and then  
press J to proceed.  
To delete all logs, press X and then press J.  
X button  
4 Select Yes.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;  
highlight Yes and press J to delete the logs.  
A Copying Logs to a Computer  
Logs are stored in the “NIKON” > “GNSS” folder on the memory card and have names  
consisting of “N” followed by the log date (yymmdd), a single-character identifier from 0 to  
Z assigned in ascending order by the camera, and the extension .log” (thus the first log  
recorded on October 1 2013 will be named “N1310010.log”). Logs can be copied to a  
computer by inserting the memory card in a card reader or card slot and transferring the files  
using Nikon Transfer 2. Logs are in NMEA format but may not display correctly in some  
applications or on some devices.  
   
GPS Options  
Use the Location data > GPS options item in the setup menu to adjust settings for  
the built-in location data unit.  
Standby Timer  
Choose whether the exposure meters turn off automatically when the location data  
function is enabled.  
Option  
Description  
Exposure meters turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the time  
selected for Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers; 0 186) > Standby timer (to allow  
Enable the camera time to acquire location data, the delay is extended by up to one minute  
after the standby timer is activated or the camera is turned on). This reduces the  
drain on the battery.  
Disable Exposure meters do not turn off while the location data function is enabled.  
Set Clock from Satellite  
Choose Yes to set the camera clock based on the time provided by the satellite  
navigation system.  
     
Update A-GPS File  
Using assisted GPS (A-GPS or aGPS) files reduces the time needed for the built-in  
location data unit to determine the current position. Assisted GPS files can be  
updated as described below.  
1 Download the latest assisted GPS file.  
Download the current assisted GPS file from the following URL:  
http://nikonimglib.com/agps2/  
2 Copy the file to the “NIKON” folder on the memory card.  
Insert the memory card in a card reader or card slot and copy the file to the  
“NIKON” folder in the root directory of the memory card (if the folder does not  
already exist, create a new folder and name it “NIKON”).  
3 Insert the memory card in the camera.  
4 Turn the camera on.  
5 Update the file.  
In the camera setup menu, navigate to the Location data > GPS options, then  
highlight Update A-GPS data and press 2. Highlight Yes and press J to  
update assisted GPS data. The update takes about two minutes.  
D Expiry Date  
Assisted GPS files remain valid for about two weeks after download  
and can not be used after their expiry date (an error message will be  
displayed if you attempt to use an out-of-date file). The expiry date  
for the current assisted GPS file can be viewed in the camera Update  
A-GPS data display. Update assisted GPS files before using the  
location data function; expired files can not be used to assist the  
acquisition of location data.  
 
D Location Data  
Local geographic and atmospheric conditions may prevent or delay the acquisition of  
location data. The camera may be unable to receive location data indoors, underground, or  
in metal containers or the vicinity of bridges and other large structures, trees, power lines, or  
other objects that block or reflect satellite signals. Pay attention to your footing and  
surroundings when looking for locations with good reception. The positions of navigation  
satellites are continuously changing, preventing or delaying the acquisition of location data  
at certain hours of the day. The presence of cellular telephones or other devices that  
transmit on frequencies close to those of navigation satellites may also interfere with the  
acquisition of location data.  
Note that in some cases the camera may take some time to acquire a signal, for example  
immediately after the battery is inserted or when the record location data function is  
enabled for the first time, or after an extended period of disuse. Location data for movies are  
for the start of recording. No data will be added to track logs while the camera is unable to  
receive location data; in addition, track logs will not be recorded if the clock is not set, the  
memory card is not inserted, or if any of the following operations are performed while the  
location data function is enabled: the battery runs low or is removed, Off is selected for  
Location data > Record location data in the setup menu, or an optional location data unit  
is connected. Note that turning the camera off does not disable the location data function.  
Depending on the accuracy of the data acquired from the satellite system and the effects of  
local topography on satellite reception, the location data recorded with pictures may differ  
from the actual location by up to several hundred meters.  
A Connecting Optional Location Data Units  
Optional Nikon location data units can be connected to the camera accessory terminal using  
the cable supplied with the unit (0 237). Be sure the camera is off before connecting the  
unit. When an optional location data unit is attached, the built-in location data unit will be  
disabled and the camera will receive location data from the optional unit only, but the  
Location data > GPS options > Standby timer and Set clock from satellite option in the  
setup menu can still be used (0 79). Track logs can not be created while an optional location  
data unit is connected.  
See the manual provided with the location data unit for more information.  
 
P, S, A, and M Modes  
Shutter Speed and Aperture  
P, S, A, and M modes offer different degrees of control over shutter  
speed and aperture:  
Mode  
Description  
Recommended for snapshots and in other situations in which  
there is little time to adjust camera settings. Camera sets shutter  
speed and aperture for optimal exposure.  
Programmed auto  
(0 84)  
P
S
Shutter-priority auto Use to freeze or blur motion. User chooses shutter speed; camera  
(0 85)  
selects aperture for best results.  
Use to blur background or bring both foreground and  
background into focus. User chooses aperture; camera selects  
shutter speed for best results.  
Aperture-priority auto  
(0 86)  
A
User controls both shutter speed and aperture. Set shutter speed  
to “Bulb” or “Time” for long time-exposures.  
Manual (0 87)  
M
                 
A Shutter Speed and Aperture  
Shutter speed and aperture are shown in the viewfinder and information display.  
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
Fast shutter speeds (1/1600 s in this example)  
freeze motion.  
Slow shutter speeds (here 1 s) blur motion.  
Large apertures (such as f/5.6; remember, the  
lower the f-number, the larger the aperture)  
blur details in front of and behind the main  
subject.  
Small apertures (f/22 in this case) bring both  
background and foreground into focus.  
 
Mode P (Programmed Auto)  
This mode is recommended for snapshots or  
whenever you want to leave the camera in charge of  
shutter speed and aperture. The camera  
Mode dial  
automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture for  
optimal exposure in most situations.  
To take pictures in programmed auto mode, rotate the  
mode dial to P.  
A Flexible Program  
In mode P, different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can be selected by rotating  
the command dial (“flexible program”). Rotate the dial right for large apertures (low f-  
numbers) and fast shutter speeds, left for small apertures (high f-numbers) and slow shutter  
speeds. All combinations produce the same exposure.  
Rotate right to blur background details or freeze motion.  
Command dial  
Rotate left to increase depth of field or blur motion.  
While flexible program is in effect, a U (R) indicator appears in the  
viewfinder and information display. To restore default shutter speed  
and aperture settings, rotate the command dial until the indicator is  
no longer displayed, choose another mode, or turn the camera off.  
         
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto)  
This mode lets you control shutter speed: choose fast shutter speeds to “freeze”  
motion, slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving objects. The  
camera automatically adjusts aperture for optimal exposure.  
Fast shutter speeds (e.g., 1/1600 s) freeze motion.  
Slow shutter speeds (e.g., 1 s) blur motion.  
Mode dial  
To choose a shutter speed:  
1 Rotate the mode dial to S.  
2 Choose a shutter speed.  
Rotate the command dial to choose the  
desired shutter speed: rotate right for faster  
speeds, left for slower speeds.  
Command dial  
     
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)  
In this mode, you can adjust aperture to control depth of field (the distance in front  
of and behind the main subject that appears to be in focus). The camera  
automatically adjusts shutter speed for optimal exposure.  
Large apertures (low f-numbers, e.g. f/5.6) blur  
details in front of and behind the main subject.  
Small apertures (high f-numbers, e.g. f/22) bring  
the foreground and background into focus.  
To choose an aperture:  
Mode dial  
1 Rotate the mode dial to A.  
2 Choose an aperture.  
Rotate the command dial left for larger  
apertures (lower f-numbers), right for smaller  
apertures (higher f-numbers).  
Command dial  
       
Mode M (Manual)  
In manual mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture. Shutter speeds of  
“Bulb” and “Time” are available for long time-exposures of moving lights, the stars,  
night scenery, or fireworks (0 88).  
Mode dial  
1 Rotate the mode dial to M.  
2 Choose aperture and shutter speed.  
Checking the exposure indicator (see below), adjust shutter speed and  
aperture. Shutter speed is selected by rotating the command dial (right for  
faster speeds, left for slower). To adjust aperture, keep the E (N) button  
pressed while rotating the command dial (left for larger apertures/lower  
f-numbers and right for smaller apertures/higher f-numbers).  
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
Command  
E (N) button Command  
dial  
dial  
A The Exposure Indicator  
If a CPU lens is attached (0 226) and a shutter speed other than “Bulb” or “Time” is selected,  
the exposure indicator in the viewfinder and information display shows whether the  
photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current settings.  
Optimal exposure  
Underexposed by 1/3 EV  
Overexposed by over 2 EV  
           
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)  
Select the following shutter speeds for long time-  
exposures of moving lights, the stars, night  
scenery, or fireworks.  
Bulb (A): The shutter remains open while  
the shutter-release button is pressed all the way  
down. To prevent blur, use a tripod or an  
optional wireless remote controller (0 237) or  
remote cord (0 237).  
Length of exposure: 35 s  
Aperture: f/25  
Time (&): Start the exposure using the shutter-release button on the camera or on  
an optional remote control, remote cord, or wireless remote controller. The shutter  
remains open for thirty minutes or until the button is pressed a second time.  
Before proceeding, mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level surface.  
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure, remove the  
rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap (0 50). To  
prevent loss of power before the exposure is complete, use a fully charged battery.  
Note that noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be present  
in long exposures; before shooting, choose On for Long exposure NR in the  
shooting menu (0 180).  
Bulb  
Mode dial  
1 Rotate the mode dial to M.  
2 Choose the shutter speed.  
Rotate the command dial to choose a  
shutter speed of Bulb (A).  
Command dial  
3 Take the photograph.  
After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the camera, optional  
wireless remote controller or remote cord all the way down. Take your finger  
from the shutter-release button when the exposure is complete.  
         
Time  
1 Rotate the mode dial to M.  
Mode dial  
2 Choose the shutter speed.  
Rotate the command dial left to choose a  
shutter speed of “Time” (&).  
Command dial  
3 Open the shutter.  
After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the camera or optional  
remote control, remote cord, or wireless remote controller all the way down.  
4 Close the shutter.  
Repeat the operation performed in Step 3 (shooting ends automatically if the  
button is not pressed after 30 minutes).  
A ML-L3 Remote Controls  
If you will be using an ML-L3 remote control, select one of the following remote control  
modes as described on page 70: " (Delayed remote (ML-L3)) or # (Quick-response  
remote (ML-L3)). Note that if you are using an ML-L3 remote control, pictures will be taken  
in “Time” mode even when “Bulb”/A is selected for shutter speed.  
Exposure  
Metering  
Choose how the camera sets exposure.  
Method  
Description  
Produces natural results in most situations. The camera meters a wide  
area of the frame and sets exposure according to tone distribution, color,  
composition, and distance.  
Classic meter for portraits. Camera meters entire frame but assigns  
greatest weight to center area. Recommended when using filters with  
an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.  
Choose this mode to ensure that subject will be correctly exposed, even  
when background is much brighter or darker. Camera meters current  
focus point; use to meter off-center subjects.  
Matrix metering  
L
M
N
Center-weighted  
metering  
Spot metering  
1 Display metering options.  
Press the P button, then highlight the  
current metering method in the information  
display and press J.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Choose a metering method.  
Highlight an option and press J.  
A Spot Metering  
If e (Auto-area AF) is selected for AF-area mode during viewfinder photography (0 53),  
the camera will meter the center focus point.  
                 
Autoexposure Lock  
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after using M (Center-weighted  
metering) and N (Spot metering) to meter exposure; note that autoexposure lock is  
not available in i or j mode.  
1 Meter exposure.  
Press the shutter-release button halfway.  
Shutter-release  
2 Lock exposure.  
button  
With the shutter-release button pressed halfway  
(q) and the subject positioned in the focus point,  
press the A (L) button (w) to lock exposure.  
A (L) button  
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L indicator  
will appear in the viewfinder.  
3 Recompose the photograph.  
Keeping the A (L) button pressed, recompose  
the photograph and shoot.  
A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture  
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted without altering the  
metered value for exposure:  
Mode  
Setting  
Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 0 84)  
Shutter speed  
Programmed auto  
Shutter-priority auto  
Aperture-priority auto  
Aperture  
The metering method itself can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect.  
     
Exposure Compensation  
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the  
camera, making pictures brighter or darker (0 260). It is most effective when used  
with M (Center-weighted metering) or N (Spot metering) (0 90).  
–1 EV  
No exposure compensation  
+1 EV  
To choose a value for exposure  
compensation, keep the E (N)  
button pressed and rotate the  
command dial until the desired  
value is selected in the viewfinder  
or information display. Normal  
exposure can be restored by  
setting exposure compensation to  
0 (adjustments to exposure  
compensation in % mode will be  
reset when another mode is  
selected). Exposure  
E (N) button Command dial  
0.3 EV  
+2 EV  
compensation is not reset when  
the camera is turned off.  
A The Information Display  
Exposure compensation options can also be accessed from the  
information display (0 7).  
A Mode M  
In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure indicator.  
A Using a Flash  
When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both background exposure and flash  
level.  
A Bracketing  
For information on automatically varying exposure over a series of shots, see page 108.  
   
Flash Compensation  
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output from the level suggested by the  
camera, changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background.  
Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced  
to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections (0 261).  
Keep the M (Y) and E (N) buttons  
pressed and rotate the command dial  
until the desired value is selected in  
the viewfinder or information display.  
In general, positive values make the  
main subject seem brighter while  
negative values make it seem darker.  
Normal flash output can be restored  
by setting flash compensation to 0.  
Flash compensation is not reset when  
the camera is turned off.  
M (Y) button  
E (N) button  
Command dial  
0.3 EV  
+1 EV  
A The Information Display  
Flash compensation options can also be accessed from the  
information display (0 7).  
A Optional Flash Units  
Flash compensation is also available with optional flash units that support the Nikon  
Creative Lighting System (CLS; see page 232). The flash compensation selected with the  
optional flash unit is added to the flash compensation selected with the camera.  
   
Preserving Detail in Highlights and  
Shadows  
Active D-Lighting  
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows, creating photographs  
with natural contrast. Use for high contrast scenes, for example when  
photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking  
pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day. Active D-Lighting is not recommended  
in mode M; in other modes, it is most effective when used with L (Matrix metering;  
0 90).  
Active D-Lighting: ! Off  
Active D-Lighting: Y Auto  
1 Display Active D-Lighting options.  
Press the P button, then highlight Active  
D-Lighting in the information display and  
press J.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Choose an option.  
Highlight an option and press J (0 261).  
     
D Active D-Lighting  
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in photographs taken with  
Active D-Lighting. Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects. Active D-Lighting  
can not be used at ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 or above.  
A “Active D-Lighting” Versus “D-Lighting”  
Active D-Lighting adjusts exposure before shooting to optimize the dynamic range, while  
the D-Lighting option in the retouch menu (0 207) brightens shadows in images after  
shooting.  
A Bracketing  
For information on automatically varying Active D-Lighting over a series of shots, see page  
 
High Dynamic Range (HDR)  
High Dynamic Range (HDR) combines two exposures to form a single image that  
captures a wide range of tones from shadows to highlights, even with high-contrast  
subjects. HDR is most effective when used with L (Matrix metering) (0 90). It can  
not be used to record NEF (RAW) images. While HDR is in effect, the flash can not be  
used and continuous shooting is not available.  
+
First exposure (darker)  
Second exposure (brighter)  
Combined HDR image  
1 Display HDR (High Dynamic Range)  
options.  
Press the P button, then highlight HDR (High  
Dynamic Range) in the information display  
and press J.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Choose an option.  
Highlight v Auto, 2 Extra high,  
S High, T Normal, U Low, or 6 Off  
and press J.  
When an option other than 6 Off is selected,  
u will be displayed in the viewfinder.  
     
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
The camera takes two exposures when the  
shutter-release button is pressed all the way  
down. “l u” will flash in the viewfinder  
while the images are combined; no photographs  
can be taken until recording is complete. HDR  
turns off automatically after the photograph is  
taken; to turn off HDR before shooting, rotate the  
mode dial to a setting other than P, S, A, or M.  
D Framing HDR Photographs  
The edges of the image may be cropped out. The desired results may not be achieved if the  
camera or subject move during shooting. Depending on the scene, the effect may not be  
visible, shadows may appear around bright objects, or halos may appear around dark  
objects. Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects.  
Multiple Exposure  
Follow the steps below to record a series of two or three exposures in a single  
photograph. Multiple exposures produce colors noticeably superior to those in  
software-generated photographic overlays created from existing images.  
Creating a Multiple Exposure  
Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view. Exit live view before proceeding.  
A Extended Recording Times  
For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s, extend the meter-off delay using  
Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers) > Standby timer (0 186). The maximum interval  
between exposures is 30 s longer than the option selected for Custom Setting c2. Shooting  
will end automatically if no operations are performed for a set period and a multiple  
exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point.  
1 Select Multiple exposure.  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
Highlight Multiple exposure in the  
shooting menu and press 2.  
G button  
2 Enable multiple exposure mode.  
Highlight Multiple exposure mode and  
press 2.  
The options shown at right will be displayed.  
Highlight On and press J.  
     
3 Choose the number of shots.  
Highlight Number of shots and press 2.  
The dialog shown at right will be displayed.  
Press 1 or 3 to choose the number of  
exposures that will be combined to form a  
single photograph and press J.  
4 Choose the amount of gain.  
Highlight Auto gain and press 2.  
The following options will be displayed.  
Highlight an option and press J.  
On: Gain is adjusted according to number  
of exposures actually recorded (gain for  
each exposure is set to 1/2 for two  
exposures, 1/3 for three exposures).  
Off: Gain is not adjusted when recording  
multiple exposure. Recommended if  
background is dark.  
5 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
In single-frame release mode, one  
photograph will be taken each time the  
shutter-release button is pressed; continue  
shooting until all exposures have been recorded. In continuous high-speed  
and continuous low-speed release modes (0 46), the camera records all  
exposures in a single burst; shooting will pause after each multiple exposure.  
 
Interrupting Multiple Exposures  
To interrupt a multiple exposure before the specified number of  
exposures have been taken, select Off for Multiple exposure >  
Multiple exposure mode in the shooting menu. A multiple  
exposure will be created from the exposures that have been  
recorded to that point. If Auto gain is on, gain will be adjusted  
to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded. Note that  
shooting will end automatically if:  
The mode dial is rotated to a setting other than P, S, A, or M  
A two-button reset is performed (0 72)  
The camera is turned off  
The battery is exhausted  
One of the exposures is deleted  
A The Multiple Exposure Indicator  
A $ icon appears in the information display when multiple exposure  
shooting is enabled. The icon flashes while shooting is in progress.  
D Multiple Exposures  
The information listed in the playback photo information display (including metering,  
exposure, shooting mode, focal length, date of recording and camera orientation) is for the  
first shot in the multiple exposure.  
 
White Balance  
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source.  
Auto white balance is recommended for most light sources; other values can be  
selected if necessary according to the type of source:  
Option  
v Auto  
Description  
Automatic white balance adjustment. Recommended in most situations.  
Incandescent Use under incandescent lighting.  
J
I
H
N
Fluorescent  
Use with the light sources listed on page 102.  
Direct sunlight Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.  
Flash  
Use with the flash.  
Cloudy  
Shade  
Use in daylight under overcast skies.  
Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.  
G
M
Measure white balance or copy white balance from existing photo  
(0 104).  
Preset manual  
L
1 Display white balance options.  
Press the P button, then highlight the  
current white balance setting in the  
information display and press J.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Choose a white balance option.  
Highlight an option and press J.  
                     
A The Shooting Menu  
White balance can be selected using the White balance option in  
the shooting menu (0 177), which also can be used to fine-tune  
white balance (0 103) or measure a value for preset white balance  
(0 104).  
The I Fluorescent option in the White balance menu can be used  
to select the light source from the bulb types shown at right.  
A Color Temperature  
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions. Color  
temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, defined with reference to  
the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same  
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5000–  
5500 K appear white, light sources with a lower color temperature, such as incandescent  
light bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature  
appear tinged with blue. The camera white balance options are adapted to the following  
color temperatures (all figures are approximate):  
I (sodium-vapor lamps): 2700 K  
J (incandescent)/  
H (direct sunlight): 5200 K  
N (flash): 5400 K  
I (warm-white fluorescent): 3000 K  
I (white fluorescent): 3700 K  
I (cool-white fluorescent): 4200 K  
I (day white fluorescent): 5000 K  
G (cloudy): 6000 K  
I (daylight fluorescent): 6500 K  
I (high temp. mercury-vapor): 7200 K  
M (shade): 8000 K  
A Bracketing  
For information on automatically varying white balance settings over a series of shots, see  
       
Fine-Tuning White Balance  
White balance can be “fine-tuned” to compensate for variations in the color of the  
light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image. White balance is  
fine-tuned using the White balance option in the shooting menu.  
1 Select a white balance option.  
Press G to display the menus, then  
highlight White balance in the shooting  
menu and press 2. Highlight the desired  
white balance option and press 2 (if  
G button  
Fluorescent is selected, highlight the  
desired lighting type and press 2; note that  
fine-tuning is not available with Preset  
manual).  
2 Fine-tune white balance.  
Use the multi selector to fine-tune white  
balance.  
Increase green  
Increase  
blue  
Increase  
amber  
A White Balance Fine-Tuning  
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative,  
not absolute. For example, moving the cursor  
to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as J  
(incandescent) is selected will make  
photographs slightly “colder” but will not  
actually make them blue.  
Increase magenta  
Coordinates  
Adjustment  
3 Save changes and exit.  
Press J.  
   
Preset Manual  
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting  
under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast. Two  
methods are available for setting preset white balance:  
Method  
Measure  
Description  
Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in final photo  
and white balance measured by camera (see below).  
Use photo White balance is copied from photo on memory card (0 107).  
Measuring a Value for Preset White Balance  
1 Light a reference object.  
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the  
final photograph.  
2 Display white balance options.  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight White balance in the shooting  
menu and press 2 to display white balance  
options. Highlight Preset manual and press  
G button  
2.  
3 Select Measure.  
Highlight Measure and press 2.  
       
4 Select Yes.  
The menu shown at right will be displayed;  
highlight Yes and press J.  
The camera will enter preset measurement  
mode.  
When the camera is ready to measure white  
balance, a flashing D (L) will appear in  
the viewfinder and information display.  
5 Measure white balance.  
Before the indicators stop flashing, frame the  
reference object so that it fills the viewfinder  
and press the shutter-release button all the  
way down. No photograph will be recorded;  
white balance can be measured accurately  
even when the camera is not in focus.  
6 Check the results.  
If the camera was able to measure a value for  
white balance, the message shown at right  
will be displayed and a will flash in the  
viewfinder for about eight seconds before  
the camera returns to shooting mode. To  
return to shooting mode immediately, press  
the shutter-release button halfway.  
If lighting is too dark or too bright, the  
camera may be unable to measure white  
balance. A message will appear in the  
information display and a flashing b a  
will appear in the viewfinder for about  
eight seconds. Return to Step 5 and  
measure white balance again.  
D Measuring Preset White Balance  
If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing, direct measurement mode  
will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers; 0 186). The default  
setting is eight seconds.  
D Preset White Balance  
The camera can store only one value for preset white balance at a time; the existing value will  
be replaced when a new value is measured. Note that exposure is automatically increased  
by 1 EV when measuring white balance; when shooting in mode M, adjust exposure so that  
the exposure indicator shows 0 (0 87).  
A Other Methods for Measuring Preset White Balance  
To enter preset measurement mode (see above) after selecting preset white balance in the  
information display (0 101), press J for a few seconds. If white balance has been assigned  
to the Fn button (0 193), white balance preset measurement mode can be activated by  
keeping the Fn button pressed for a few seconds after selecting preset white balance with  
the Fn button and command dial.  
A Gray Panels  
For more precise results, measure white balance using a standard gray panel.  
 
Copying White Balance from a Photograph  
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from a photograph on the  
memory card.  
1 Select Preset manual.  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight White balance in the shooting  
menu and press 2 to display white balance  
options. Highlight Preset manual and press  
G button  
2.  
2 Select Use photo.  
Highlight Use photo and press 2.  
3 Choose Select image.  
Highlight Select image and press 2 (to skip  
the remaining steps and use the image last  
selected for preset white balance, select This  
image).  
4 Choose a folder.  
Highlight the folder containing the source  
image and press 2.  
5 Highlight the source image.  
To view the highlighted image full frame,  
press and hold the X button.  
6 Copy white balance.  
Press J to set preset white balance to the  
white balance value for the highlighted  
photograph.  
   
Bracketing  
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, white balance, or Active D-Lighting (ADL)  
settings slightly with each shot, “bracketing” the current value. Choose in situations  
in which it is difficult to set exposure or white balance and there is not time to check  
results and adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment with different settings for  
the same subject.  
Option  
Description  
Vary exposure over a series of three photographs.  
AE  
k
bracketing  
Shot 1: unmodified  
Shot 2: exposure reduced Shot 3: exposure increased  
WB  
Each time the shutter is released, the camera creates three images, each with a  
m
!
bracketing different white balance. Not available with image qualities of NEF (RAW).  
ADL Take one photo with Active D-Lighting off, and another at the current Active  
bracketing D-Lighting setting.  
1 Choose a bracketing option.  
After pressing G to display the menus,  
highlight Custom Setting e2 (Auto  
bracketing set) and press 2.  
G button  
Highlight the desired bracketing type and  
press J.  
         
2 Display bracketing options.  
Press the P button, then highlight the  
current bracketing setting and press J.  
P button  
Information display  
3 Select a bracketing increment.  
Highlight a bracketing increment and press  
J. Choose from values between 0.3 and  
2 EV (AE bracketing) or 1 to 3 (WB  
bracketing), or select ADL (ADL bracketing).  
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
AE bracketing: The camera will vary exposure  
with each shot. The first shot will be taken at  
the value currently selected for exposure compensation. The bracketing  
increment will be subtracted from the current value in the second shot and  
added in the third shot, “bracketing” the current value. The modified values are  
reflected in the values shown for shutter speed and aperture.  
WB bracketing: Each shot is processed to create three copies, one at the current  
white balance setting, one with increased amber, and one with increased blue.  
ADL bracketing: The first shot after bracketing is activated is taken with Active  
D-Lighting off, the second at the current Active D-Lighting setting (0 94; if  
Active D-Lighting is off, the second shot will be taken with Active D-Lighting set  
to Auto).  
In continuous high-speed and continuous low-speed release modes, shooting will  
pause after each bracketing cycle. If the camera is turned off before all shots in the  
bracketing sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot in  
the sequence when the camera is turned on.  
 
A The Bracketing Progress Indicator  
During AE bracketing, a bar is removed from the bracketing  
progress indicator with each shot (v > w > x).  
During ADL bracketing, the setting that will be used for the next  
shot is underlined in the information display.  
A Disabling Bracketing  
To disable bracketing and resume normal shooting, select OFF in Step 3 on the previous  
page. To cancel bracketing before all frames have been recorded, rotate the mode dial to a  
setting other than P, S, A, or M.  
A Exposure Bracketing  
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture (mode P), aperture  
(mode S), or shutter speed (modes A and M). If auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled, the  
camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the  
camera exposure system are exceeded.  
 
Picture Controls  
Nikon’s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share image processing  
settings, including sharpening, contrast, brightness, saturation, and hue, among  
compatible devices and software.  
Selecting a Picture Control  
Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene.  
Option  
Description  
Recommended for most situations, this option uses standard processing for  
balanced results.  
Q Standard  
A good choice for photographs that will later be extensively processed or  
retouched, this option uses minimal processing for natural results.  
Choose this option for photographs that emphasize primary colors. Pictures  
are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect.  
R Neutral  
S Vivid  
T Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.  
e Portrait  
Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a rounded feel.  
f Landscape Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.  
1 Display Picture Control options.  
Press the P button, then highlight the  
current Picture Control and press J.  
P button  
Information display  
2 Select a Picture Control.  
Highlight a Picture Control and press J.  
                   
Modifying Picture Controls  
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls (0 115) can be modified to suit the scene  
or the user’s creative intent. Choose a balanced combination of settings using Quick  
adjust, or make manual adjustments to individual settings.  
1 Select a Picture Control.  
Press G to display the menus, then  
highlight Set Picture Control in the  
shooting menu and press 2. Highlight the  
desired Picture Control and press 2.  
G button  
2 Adjust settings.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired setting  
and press 4 or 2 to choose a value (0 113).  
Repeat this step until all settings have been  
adjusted, or select Quick adjust to choose a  
preset combination of settings. Default settings can be restored by pressing  
the O button.  
3 Save changes and exit.  
Press J.  
Picture Controls that have been modified from default  
settings are indicated by an asterisk (“*”).  
     
Picture Control Settings  
Option  
Description  
Mute or heighten the effect of the selected Picture Control (note that  
this resets all manual adjustments). Not available with Neutral,  
Monochrome, or custom Picture Controls.  
Quick adjust  
Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust sharpening  
automatically according to the type of scene.  
Sharpening  
Adjust contrast manually or select A to let the camera adjust contrast  
automatically.  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Raise or lower brightness without loss of detail in highlights or shadows.  
Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust saturation  
automatically according to the type of scene.  
Saturation  
Hue  
Adjust hue.  
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs  
Filter effects  
Toning  
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs (0 114).  
D “A” (Auto)  
Results for auto sharpening, contrast, and saturation vary with exposure and the position of  
the subject in the frame.  
A Custom Picture Controls  
Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing Picture Controls using  
the Manage Picture Control option in the shooting menu (0 115) and can be saved to a  
memory card for sharing among other cameras of the same model and compatible software  
                   
A The Picture Control Grid  
To display a grid showing saturation (non-monochrome controls  
only) and contrast for the Picture Control selected in Step 2, press and  
hold the X button.  
The icons for Picture Controls that use auto contrast and saturation  
are displayed in green in the Picture Control grid, and lines appear  
parallel to the axes of the grid.  
A Previous Settings  
The line under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu  
indicates the previous value for the setting.  
A Custom Picture Controls  
The options available with custom picture controls are the same as those on which the  
custom picture control was based.  
A Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)  
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs.  
The following filter effects are available:  
Option  
Yellow  
Description  
Y
O
R
G
Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness of the sky in  
Orange landscape photographs. Orange produces more contrast than yellow, red  
more contrast than orange.  
Green Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.  
Red  
Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those  
produced by physical glass filters.  
A Toning (Monochrome Only)  
Choose from B&W (black-and-white), Sepia, Cyanotype (blue-tinted  
monochrome), Red, Yellow, Green, Blue Green, Blue, Purple Blue,  
Red Purple. Pressing 3 when Toning is selected displays saturation  
options. Press 4 or 2 to adjust saturation. Saturation control is not  
available when B&W (black-and-white) is selected.  
       
Creating Custom Picture Controls  
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as custom  
Picture Controls.  
1 Select Manage Picture Control.  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight Manage Picture Control in the  
shooting menu and press 2.  
G button  
2 Select Save/edit.  
Highlight Save/edit and press 2.  
3 Select a Picture Control.  
Highlight an existing Picture Control and  
press 2, or press J to proceed to step 5 to  
save a copy of the highlighted Picture  
Control without further modification.  
4 Edit the selected Picture Control.  
See page 113 for more information. To  
abandon any changes and start over from  
default settings, press the O button. Press J  
when settings are complete.  
5 Select a destination.  
Highlight a destination for the custom  
Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and  
press 2.  
     
6 Name the Picture Control.  
Keyboard  
area  
By default, new Picture Controls are named  
by adding a two-digit number (assigned  
automatically) to the name of the existing  
Picture Control; to use the default name,  
Name area  
proceed to Step 7. To move the cursor in the name area, rotate the command  
dial. To enter a letter, use the multi selector to highlight the desired character in  
the keyboard area and press J. To delete the character at the current cursor  
position, press the O button.  
Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen characters long. Any  
characters after the nineteenth will be deleted.  
7 Save changes and exit.  
Press X to save changes and exit. The new  
Picture Control will appear in the Picture  
Control list.  
A Manage Picture Control > Rename  
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any time using the Rename option in the  
Manage Picture Control menu.  
A Manage Picture Control > Delete  
The Delete option in the Manage Picture Control menu can be used to delete selected  
custom Picture Controls when they are no longer needed.  
A The Original Picture Control Icon  
The original preset Picture Control on which the  
custom Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon  
in the top right corner of the edit display.  
Original Picture Control icon  
 
Sharing Custom Picture Controls  
Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility available with  
ViewNX 2 or optional software such as Capture NX 2 can be copied to a memory card  
and loaded into the camera, or custom Picture Controls created with the camera can  
be copied to the memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software and  
then deleted when no longer needed.  
To copy custom Picture Controls to or from the  
memory card, or to delete custom Picture Controls  
from the memory card, highlight Load/Save in the  
Manage Picture Control menu and press 2. The  
following options will be displayed:  
Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture Controls from the  
memory card to custom Picture Controls C-1  
through C-9 on the camera and name them as  
desired.  
Delete from card: Delete selected custom Picture  
Controls from the memory card.  
Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1  
through C-9) from the camera to a selected  
destination (1 through 99) on the memory card.  
A Saving Custom Picture Controls  
Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time. The  
memory card can only be used to store user-created custom Picture Controls. The preset  
Picture Controls supplied with the camera can not be copied to the memory card, renamed,  
or deleted.  
 
Live View  
Framing Photographs in the Monitor  
Follow the steps below to take photographs in live view.  
1 Rotate the live view switch.  
The view through the lens will be displayed in the  
monitor.  
Live view switch  
2 Position the focus point.  
Position the focus point over your subject as  
described on page 121.  
Focus point  
3 Focus.  
Press the shutter-release button halfway. The  
focus point will flash green while the camera  
focuses. If the camera is able to focus, the focus  
point will be displayed in green; if the camera is unable to focus, the focus point  
will flash red (note that pictures can be taken even when the focus point flashes  
red; check focus in the monitor before shooting). Except in i and j modes,  
exposure can be locked by pressing the A (L) button.  
4 Take the picture.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the  
way down. The monitor turns off and the  
memory card access lamp lights during  
recording. Do not remove the battery or memory  
card until recording is complete. When shooting is  
Memory card access lamp  
complete, the photograph will be displayed in  
the monitor for a few seconds before the camera returns to live view mode. To  
exit, rotate the live view switch.  
               
Focusing in Live View  
Follow the steps below to choose focus and AF-area modes and position the focus  
point.  
Choosing How the Camera Focuses (Focus Mode)  
The following focus modes are available in live view (note that full-time–servo AF is  
not available in g, ', and ( modes):  
Option  
Description  
For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutter-release button is  
pressed halfway.  
AF-S Single-servo AF  
For moving subjects. Camera focuses continuously until shutter-  
AF-F Full-time-servo AF release button is pressed. Focus locks when shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway.  
MF Manual focus  
Focus manually (0 125).  
1 Display focus options.  
Press the P button, then highlight the  
current focus mode in the information  
display and press J.  
P button  
2 Choose a focus option.  
Highlight an option and press J.  
                 
Choosing How the Camera Picks the Area (AF-Area Mode)  
In modes other than i, j, and (, the following AF-area modes can be selected in  
live view (note that subject-tracking AF is not available in %, g, ', and 3 modes):  
Option  
Description  
Use for portraits. The camera automatically detects and focuses  
on portrait subjects.  
Use for hand-held shots of landscapes and other non-portrait  
subjects. Use the multi selector to select the focus point.  
Use for pin-point focus on a selected spot in the frame. A tripod is  
recommended.  
Face-priority AF  
6
7
8
Wide-area AF  
Normal-area AF  
9 Subject-tracking AF Use if you want focus to track a selected subject.  
1 Display AF-area modes.  
Press the P button, then highlight the  
current AF-area mode in the information  
display and press J.  
P button  
2 Choose an AF-area mode.  
Highlight an option and press J.  
             
3 Choose the focus point.  
6 (face-priority AF): A double yellow border will be  
displayed when the camera detects a portrait  
subject (if multiple faces, up to a maximum of 35,  
are detected, the camera will focus on the closest  
subject; to choose a different subject, use the  
multi selector). If the camera can no longer  
detect the subject (because, for example, the  
subject has turned to face away from the camera),  
the border will no longer be displayed.  
Focus point  
7/8 (wide- and normal-area AF): Use the multi  
selector to move the focus point anywhere in the  
frame, or press J to position the focus point in  
the center of the frame.  
Focus point  
9 (subject-tracking AF): Position the focus point  
over your subject and press J. The focus point  
will track the selected subject as it moves through  
the frame. To end focus tracking, press J a  
second time.  
Focus point  
         
The Live View Display  
u
i o  
q
w
e
r
!
!
!
t
y
!
Item  
Description  
0
Shooting mode  
“No movie” icon  
Time remaining  
The mode currently selected with the mode dial.  
q
w
e
Indicates that movies can not be recorded.  
The amount of time remaining before live view ends  
automatically. Displayed if shooting will end in 30 s or less.  
Microphone  
sensitivity  
Microphone sensitivity for movie recording.  
r
t
y
u
Sound level for audio recording. Displayed in red if level is  
too high; adjust microphone sensitivity accordingly.  
Displayed when On is selected for Movie settings > Wind  
noise reduction in the shooting menu.  
Sound level  
Wind noise  
reduction  
Manual movie  
Displayed when On is selected for Manual movie settings  
settings indicator in mode M.  
Focus mode  
The current focus mode.  
i
o
!
AF-area mode  
The current AF-area mode.  
Movie frame size  
Time remaining  
(movie mode)  
The frame size of movies recorded in movie mode.  
The recording time remaining in movie mode.  
!
!
!
The current focus point. The display varies with the option  
selected for AF-area mode (0 120).  
Indicates whether the photograph would be under- or over-  
exposed at current settings (mode M only).  
Focus point  
Exposure indicator  
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.  
         
A Live View/Movie Recording Display Options  
Press the R button to cycle through display options as shown below.  
Circled areas indicate edges of movie frame crop.  
R button  
Show detailed  
photo indicators  
Show movie indicators  
Hide indicators*  
(0 128) *  
Show basic photo  
Framing grid*  
indicators *  
* A crop showing the area recorded is displayed during movie recording when frame sizes  
other than 640 × 424 are selected for Movie settings > Frame size/frame rate in the  
shooting menu (0 128; the area outside the movie frame crop is grayed out when movie  
indicators are displayed).  
A Camera Settings  
Except when movie indicators are displayed, you can  
access the following live view photography settings  
by pressing the P button: image quality (0 59), image  
size (0 61), bracketing increment (0 109), HDR  
(0 96), Active D-Lighting (0 94), white balance  
(0 101), ISO sensitivity (0 67), Picture Controls  
P button  
(0 111), focus mode (0 119), AF-area mode (0 120),  
compensation (0 93), and exposure compensation  
(0 92). When movie indicators are displayed, movie  
settings can be adjusted (0 122).  
   
A Exposure  
Depending on the scene, exposure may differ from that which would be obtained when live  
view is not used. Metering in live view is adjusted to suit the live view display, producing  
photographs with exposure close to what is seen in the monitor (note that exposure  
compensation can only be previewed in the monitor at values between +3 EV and –3 EV). To  
prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure, remove the rubber  
eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap before shooting (0 50).  
A HDMI  
When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the camera monitor will remain on  
and the video device will display the view through the lens. If the device supports HDMI-  
CEC, select Off for the HDMI > Device control option in the setup menu (0 166) before  
shooting in live view.  
D Shooting in Live View Mode  
Although they will not appear in the final picture, distortion may be visible in the monitor if  
the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame. Bright  
light sources may leave after-images in the monitor when the camera is panned. Bright  
spots may also appear. Flicker and banding visible in the monitor under fluorescent,  
mercury vapor, or sodium lamps can be reduced using Flicker reduction (0 200), although  
they may still be visible in the final photograph at some shutter speeds. When shooting in  
live view mode, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to  
observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.  
Live view ends automatically when the monitor is closed (closing the monitor does not end  
live view on televisions or other external displays).  
Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits; exit live  
view when the camera is not in use. Note that the temperature of the camera’s internal  
circuits may rise and noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be  
displayed in the following instances (the camera may also become noticeably warm, but this  
does not indicate a malfunction):  
The ambient temperature is high  
The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to record movies  
The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended periods  
If live view does not start when you attempt to start live view, wait for the internal circuits to  
cool and then try again.  
D The Count Down Display  
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends automatically (0 122; the timer  
turns red 5 s before the auto off timer expires (0 186) or if live view is about to end to protect  
the internal circuits). Depending on shooting conditions, the timer may appear immediately  
when live view is selected.  
   
D Using Autofocus in Live View  
Autofocus is slower in live view and the monitor may brighten or darken while the camera  
focuses. The camera may be unable to focus in the situations listed below (note that the  
focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus):  
The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame  
The subject lacks contrast  
The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness, or the  
subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or other light source that changes in  
brightness  
Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor, sodium-vapor, or similar  
lighting  
A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used  
The subject appears smaller than the focus point  
The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds or a row of windows  
in a skyscraper)  
The subject is moving  
In addition, the subject-tracking AF may be unable to track subjects if they move quickly,  
leave the frame or are obscured by other objects, change visibly in size, color, or brightness,  
or are too small, too large, too bright, too dark, or similar in color or brightness to the  
background.  
A Manual Focus  
To focus in manual focus mode (0 57), rotate the  
lens focus ring until the subject is in focus.  
To magnify the view in the monitor up to about 8.3 ×  
for precise focus, press the X button. While the view  
through the lens is zoomed in, a navigation window  
will appear in a gray frame at the bottom right corner  
of the display. Use the multi selector to scroll to areas  
of the frame not visible in the monitor (available only  
if 7 (Wide-area AF) or 8 (Normal-area AF) is  
selected for AF-area mode), or press W (Q) to zoom  
out.  
X button  
Navigation window  
   
Recording and Viewing Movies  
Recording Movies  
Movies can be recorded in live view mode.  
1 Rotate the live view switch.  
The view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor.  
D The 0 Icon  
A 0 icon (0 122) indicates that movies can not be recorded.  
A Before Recording  
Set aperture before recording in mode A or M (0 86, 87).  
Live view switch  
2 Focus.  
Frame the opening shot and focus as described in Steps 2  
and 3 of “Framing Photographs in the Monitor” (0 118;  
see also “Focusing in Live View” on pages 0 119–121).  
Note that the number of subjects that can be detected in  
face-priority AF drops during movie recording.  
3 Start recording.  
Press the movie-record button to start recording. A  
recording indicator and the time available are displayed in  
the monitor. Except in i and j modes, exposure can be  
locked by pressing the A (L) button (0 91) or (in modes  
P, S, A, and %) altered by up to 3 EV in steps of 1/3 EV by  
pressing the E (N) button and rotating the command dial  
(0 92; note that depending on the brightness of the  
subject, changes to exposure may have no visible effect).  
Movie-record button  
Recording indicator  
Time remaining  
               
4 End recording.  
Press the movie-record button again to end recording. Recording will end  
automatically when the maximum length is reached, the memory card is full,  
another mode is selected, or the monitor is closed (closing the monitor does  
not end recording on televisions or other external displays).  
A Taking Photographs During Movie Recording  
To end movie recording, take a photograph, and exit to live view, press the shutter-release  
button all the way down and hold it in this position until the shutter is released.  
A Maximum Length  
The maximum length for individual movie files is 4 GB (for maximum recording times, see  
page 128); note that depending on memory card write speed, shooting may end before this  
length is reached (0 238).  
D Recording Movies  
Flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the final movie under  
fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an  
object moves at high speed through frame (flicker and banding can be reduced using  
Flicker reduction; 0 200). Bright light sources may leave after-images when the camera is  
panned. Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots may also appear. Bright  
bands may appear in some areas of the frame if the subject is briefly illuminated by a flash or  
other bright, momentary light source. When recording movies, avoid pointing the camera at  
the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in  
damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.  
The camera can record both video and sound; do not cover the microphone during  
recording. Note that the built-in microphone may record lens noise during autofocus and  
vibration reduction.  
Flash lighting can not be used during movie recording.  
Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits; exit live  
view when the camera is not in use. Note that the temperature of the camera’s internal  
circuits may rise and noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be  
displayed in the following instances (the camera may also become noticeably warm, but this  
does not indicate a malfunction):  
The ambient temperature is high  
The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to record movies  
The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended periods  
If live view does not start when you attempt to start live view or movie recording, wait for the  
internal circuits to cool and then try again.  
Matrix metering is used regardless of the metering method selected. Shutter speed and ISO  
sensitivity are adjusted automatically unless On is selected for Manual movie settings  
   
Movie Settings  
The camera offers the following movie settings.  
Frame size/frame rate, Movie quality: Choose from the following options. The  
frame rate depends on the option currently selected for Video mode in the setup  
menu (0 202):  
Frame size/frame rate  
Frame size (pixels)  
Maximum length (high movie quality /  
normal movie quality) 4  
Frame rate 1  
L/t  
M/u  
N/r  
O/s  
P/k  
Q/l  
R/o  
S/n  
T/p  
60p 2  
50p 3  
30p 2  
25p 3  
24p  
60p 2  
50p 3  
30p 2  
25p 3  
10 min./20 min.  
1920 × 1080  
20 min./29 min. 59 s  
1280 × 720  
640 × 424  
29 min. 59 s/  
29 min. 59 s  
1 Listed value. Actual frame rates for 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and 24p are 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and  
23.976 fps respectively.  
2 Available when NTSC is selected for Video mode (0 202).  
3 Available when PAL is selected for Video mode.  
4 Movies recorded in miniature effect mode are up to three minutes long when played back.  
Microphone: Turn the built-in or optional ME-1 stereo microphones (0 129, 237)  
on or off or adjust microphone sensitivity. Choose Auto sensitivity to adjust  
sensitivity automatically, Microphone off to turn sound recording off; to select  
microphone sensitivity manually, select Manual sensitivity and choose a  
sensitivity.  
Wind noise reduction: Select On to enable the low-cut filter for the built-in  
microphone (optional stereo microphones are unaffected; 0 129, 237), reducing  
noise produced by wind blowing over the microphone (note that other sounds  
may also be affected).  
A The Live View Display  
The movie crop can be viewed during live view by  
pressing the R button to select the “show movie  
indicators, hide indicators, framing grid, or “show  
basic photo indicators” display (0 123). When movie  
indicators are displayed, you can access the following  
movie settings by pressing the P button: movie frame  
P button  
size/quality, microphone sensitivity, white balance  
(0 101), ISO sensitivity (0 67), Picture Controls  
(0 111), focus mode (0 119), AF-area mode (0 120),  
and exposure compensation (0 92).  
             
Manual movie settings: Choose On to allow manual  
adjustments to shutter speed and ISO sensitivity when the  
camera is in mode M. Shutter speed can be set to values as  
fast as 1/4000 s; the slowest speed available varies with the  
frame rate: 1/30 s for frame rates of 24p, 25p, and 30p, 1/50 s for  
50p, and 1/60 s for 60p. ISO sensitivity can be set to values between ISO 100 and Hi  
1 (0 67). If shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are not in these ranges when live view  
starts, they will automatically be set to supported values, and remain at these  
values when live view ends. Note that ISO sensitivity is fixed at the value selected;  
the camera does not adjust ISO sensitivity automatically when On is selected for  
ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control in the shooting menu  
(0 181).  
1 Select Movie settings.  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
Highlight Movie settings in the shooting  
menu and press 2.  
G button  
2 Choose movie options.  
Highlight the desired item and press 2, then  
highlight an option and press J.  
A Using an External Microphone  
The optional ME-1 stereo microphone can be used to reduce noise caused by lens vibration  
being recorded during autofocus.  
D The Count-Down Display  
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends automatically (0 122). Depending  
on shooting conditions, the timer may appear immediately when movie recording begins.  
Note that regardless of the amount of recording time available, live view will still end  
automatically when the timer expires. Wait for the internal circuits to cool before resuming  
movie recording.  
A HDMI and Other Video Devices  
When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the camera monitor will remain on  
and the video device will display the view through the lens. If the device supports  
HDMI-CEC, select Off for the HDMI > Device control option in the setup menu (0 166)  
before shooting in live view.  
         
Viewing Movies  
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon in full-frame playback (0 135). Press J to start  
playback; your current position is indicated by the movie progress bar.  
1 icon  
Length  
Current position/total length  
Volume  
Movie progress bar  
Guide  
The following operations can be performed:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Pause  
Pause playback.  
Resume playback when movie is paused or during rewind/  
advance.  
Play  
Speed increases with each press, from 2× to 4× to 8× to 16×;  
keep pressed to skip to beginning or end of movie (first frame is  
indicated by h in top right corner of monitor, last frame by i).  
If playback is paused, movie rewinds or advances one frame at  
a time; hold for continuous rewind or advance.  
Advance/  
rewind  
Skip 10 s  
Rotate the command dial to skip ahead or back 10 s.  
Adjust volume  
Press X to increase volume, W (Q) to decrease.  
X/W (Q)  
Return to full-  
frame playback  
/K Press 1 or K to exit to full-frame playback.  
       
Editing Movies  
Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected frames as JPEG stills.  
Option  
Description  
Create a copy from which the opening or closing footage has  
been removed.  
f Choose start/end point  
g Save selected frame  
Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.  
Trimming Movies  
To create trimmed copies of movies:  
1 Display a movie full frame.  
2 Pause the movie on the new opening  
or closing frame.  
Play the movie back as described on page  
130, pressing J to start and resume  
playback and 3 to pause. Pause playback  
when you reach the new opening or closing  
frame.  
Movie progress bar  
3 Select Choose start/end point.  
Press the P button, then highlight Choose  
start/end point and press 2.  
P button  
         
4 Choose the current frame as the new  
start or end point.  
To create a copy that begins from the current  
frame, highlight Start point and press J.  
The frames before the current frame will be  
removed when you save the copy.  
Start point  
To create a copy that ends at the current frame, highlight End point and press  
J. The frames after the current frame will be removed when you save the copy.  
End point  
5 Confirm the new start or end point.  
If the desired frame is not currently  
displayed, press 4 or 2 to advance or  
rewind (to skip to 10 s ahead or back, rotate  
the command dial).  
6 Create the copy.  
Once the desired frame is displayed, press 1.  
7 Preview the movie.  
To preview the copy, highlight Preview and  
press J. To abandon the current copy and  
return to Step 5, highlight Cancel and press  
J; to save the copy, proceed to Step 8.  
8 Save the copy.  
Highlight Save as new file and press J to  
save the copy to a new file. To replace the  
original movie file with the edited copy,  
highlight Overwrite existing file and press  
J.  
D Trimming Movies  
Movies must be at least two seconds long. The copy will not be saved if there is insufficient  
space available on the memory card.  
Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.  
A Choosing the Role of the Current Frame  
To make the frame displayed in Step 5 the new end  
point (x) instead of the new start point (w) or vice  
versa, press the A (L) button.  
A (L) button  
Saving Selected Frames  
To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:  
1 Pause the movie on the desired frame.  
Play the movie back as described on page  
130, pressing J to start and resume  
playback and 3 to pause. Pause the movie  
at the frame you intend to copy.  
2 Choose Save selected frame.  
Press the P button, then highlight Save  
selected frame and press 2.  
P button  
3 Create a still copy.  
Press 1 to create a still copy of the current  
frame.  
4 Save the copy.  
Highlight Yes and press J to create a fine-  
quality (0 59) JPEG copy of the selected  
frame.  
A Save Selected Frame  
JPEG movie stills created with the Save selected frame option can not be retouched. JPEG  
movie stills lack some categories of photo information (0 136).  
     
Playback and Deletion  
Full-Frame Playback  
To play photographs back, press the K button.  
The most recent photograph will be displayed in  
the monitor.  
K button  
To  
Use  
Description  
View additional  
photographs  
Press 2 to view photographs in order recorded, 4 to view  
photographs in reverse order.  
View additional  
photo info  
Change photo info displayed (0 136).  
W (Q)  
See page 140 for more information on the thumbnail  
display.  
View thumbnails  
Zoom in on  
photograph  
X
O
See page 142 for more information on playback zoom.  
Confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press O again to  
delete photo.  
Delete images  
Change protect  
status  
To protect image, or to remove protection from protected  
image, press A (L) button (0 143).  
A (L)  
If current picture is marked with 1 icon to show that it is a  
movie, pressing J starts movie playback (0 130).  
Play movie  
A The P Button  
Pressing the P button in full-frame, thumbnail, or  
calendar playback displays the dialog shown at right,  
where you can rate pictures (0 144), retouch photos  
and edit movies (0 131, 205), and select pictures for  
transfer to a smart device (0 173).  
P button  
         
Photo Information  
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-frame playback.  
Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo information as shown below. Note that “image  
only, shooting data, RGB histograms, highlights, and overview data are only  
displayed if corresponding option is selected for Playback display options (0 176).  
Location data are only displayed if location data were embedded in the picture when  
it was taken (0 74).  
File information  
None (image only)  
Overview  
Location data  
Shooting data  
Highlights  
File Information  
1 2 3  
RGB histogram  
Protect status........................................................... 143  
Retouch indicator................................................... 206  
Upload marking...................................................... 173  
Frame number/total number of images  
1
2
3
4
4
File name................................................................... 189  
Image quality..............................................................59  
Image size ....................................................................61  
Time of recording............................................ 14, 201  
Date of recording ............................................ 14, 201  
Folder name ............................................................. 178  
Rating ......................................................................... 144  
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
5
11  
10  
6
9
8
7
Highlights *  
1 2  
3
4
Protect status........................................................... 143  
Retouch indicator................................................... 206  
Upload marking...................................................... 173  
Frame number/total number of images  
Image highlights  
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
Rating ......................................................................... 144  
6
* Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be overexposed).  
     
RGB Histogram  
1
Frame number/total number of images  
1
2
Histogram (RGB channel). In all histograms,  
horizontal axis gives pixel brightness, vertical  
axis number of pixels.  
2
3
4
5
Histogram (red channel)  
3
4
5
6
7
Histogram (green channel)  
10  
9
8
Histogram (blue channel)  
Upload marking ......................................................173  
White balance ..........................................................101  
White balance fine-tuning ...............................103  
Preset manual.......................................................104  
7
6
Retouch indicator ...................................................206  
Protect status ...........................................................143  
Rating..........................................................................144  
8
9
10  
A Playback Zoom  
To zoom in on the photograph when the histogram is  
displayed, press X. Use the X and W (Q) buttons to zoom  
in and out and scroll the image with the multi selector. The  
histogram will be updated to show only the data for the  
portion of the image visible in the monitor.  
A Histograms  
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in  
imaging applications. Some sample histograms are shown below:  
If the image contains objects with a wide range of  
brightnesses, the distribution of tones will be relatively  
even.  
If the image is dark, tone distribution will be shifted to the  
left.  
If the image is bright, tone distribution will be shifted to  
the right.  
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right, while  
decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left. Histograms can  
provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to  
see photographs in the monitor.  
   
Shooting Data  
Shooting mode .....................................19, 30, 37, 82  
ISO sensitivity 1 .......................................................... 67  
Exposure compensation........................................ 92  
5
1
2
3
15  
4
5
6
7
8
9
Focal length..............................................................231  
Lens data  
6
7
8
Focus mode .......................................................51, 119  
Lens VR (vibration reduction) 2 ..........................267  
Flash type .........................................................192, 232  
Commander mode 2  
9
10  
11  
12  
10  
13  
14  
Flash mode .......................................................... 63, 65  
11  
12  
Flash control.............................................................192  
Flash compensation ................................................ 93  
Rating..........................................................................144  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Camera name  
Frame number/total number of images  
White balance..........................................................101  
White balance fine-tuning...............................103  
Preset manual.......................................................104  
Color space ...............................................................179  
17  
18  
19  
Picture Control.........................................................111  
Quick adjust 3 ...........................................................113  
Original Picture Control 3 .....................................111  
Sharpening ...............................................................113  
25  
26  
27  
28  
20  
21  
22  
23  
Contrast......................................................................113  
Brightness .................................................................113  
29  
Saturation 3 ...............................................................113  
Filter effects 3............................................................113  
Hue 3 ............................................................................113  
Toning 3 ......................................................................113  
High ISO noise reduction.....................................180  
Long exposure noise reduction ........................180  
Active D-Lighting ..................................................... 94  
24  
25  
Protect status ...........................................................143  
Retouch indicator...................................................206  
Upload marking......................................................173  
1
2
3
4
26  
27  
28  
29  
HDR (high dynamic range).................................... 96  
Retouch history.......................................................205  
Image comment .....................................................202  
Metering ...................................................................... 90  
Shutter speed............................................................. 83  
Aperture....................................................................... 83  
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.  
2 Displayed only in photos taken with accessories that support this function.  
3 May not be displayed depending on Picture Control used.  
   
Overview Data  
1
2
3
4
5
14 15 16  
17  
18  
19  
6
13  
20  
21  
28  
27  
26  
25 24  
23  
22  
7
12  
11  
10  
9
8
Shutter speed.............................................................83  
Aperture .......................................................................83  
ISO sensitivity 1...........................................................67  
Focal length ............................................................. 231  
Location data indicator...........................................74  
Image comment indicator.................................. 202  
Active D-Lighting......................................................94  
Picture Control ........................................................ 111  
Color space............................................................... 179  
Flash mode..................................................................63  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
Frame number/total number of images  
Protect status........................................................... 143  
Camera name  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Retouch indicator................................................... 206  
Upload marking...................................................... 173  
Histogram showing the distribution of tones in  
the image (0 137).  
Image quality..............................................................59  
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Image size....................................................................61  
File name................................................................... 189  
Time of recording............................................ 14, 201  
Date of recording ............................................ 14, 201  
Folder name............................................................. 178  
Rating ......................................................................... 144  
Metering.......................................................................90  
Shooting mode.....................................19, 30, 37, 82  
White balance.......................................................... 101  
White balance fine-tuning.................................. 103  
Preset manual.......................................................... 104  
Flash compensation.................................................93  
Commander mode 2  
27  
28  
Exposure compensation.........................................92  
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.  
2 Displayed only in photos taken with accessories that support this function.  
Location Data  
Location data are displayed only if location data were embedded in the picture when  
it was taken (0 74). In the case of movies, the data give the location at the start of  
recording.  
1
2
3
Protect status........................................................... 143  
Retouch indicator .................................................. 206  
Upload marking...................................................... 173  
Latitude  
1
2
3
10  
4
5
6
7
4
Longitude  
5
6
Altitude  
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)  
Rating ......................................................................... 144  
Camera name  
7
8
9
8
9
Frame number/total number of images  
10  
     
Thumbnail Playback  
To display images in “contact sheets” of 4, 12, or 80 images, press the W (Q) button.  
W (Q)  
W (Q)  
X
X
Full-frame  
playback  
Thumbnail playback  
Calendar  
playback  
To  
Use  
Description  
Display more  
images  
Press W (Q) button to increase the number of images  
displayed.  
W (Q)  
Press X button to reduce the number of images displayed.  
When four images are displayed, press to view highlighted  
image full frame.  
Display fewer  
images  
X
Highlight images  
Use multi selector or command dial to highlight pictures.  
Viewhighlighted  
image  
Press J to display the highlighted image full frame.  
Delete  
highlighted  
photo  
Change protect  
status of  
See page 146 for more information.  
See page 143 for more information.  
O
A (L)  
highlighted  
photo  
   
Calendar Playback  
To view images taken on a selected date, press the W (Q) button when 80 images are  
displayed.  
Thumbnail list  
W (Q)  
W (Q)  
X
X
Date list  
Calendar  
Full-frame  
playback  
Thumbnail playback  
playback  
The operations that can be performed depend on whether the cursor is in the date  
list or the thumbnail list:  
To  
Use  
Description  
W (Q)  
Toggle between date  
list and thumbnail list  
Press W (Q) or J button in date list to place cursor in  
thumbnail list. Press W (Q) again to return to date list.  
Exit to thumbnail  
playback/Zoom in on  
highlighted photo  
Date list: Exit to 80-frame playback.  
Thumbnail list: Press and hold X button to zoom in on  
highlighted picture.  
X
Highlight dates/  
Highlight images  
Date list: Highlight date.  
Thumbnail list: Highlight picture.  
Toggle full frame  
playback  
Thumbnail list: View highlighted picture.  
Delete highlighted  
photo(s)  
Date list: Delete all pictures taken on selected date.  
Thumbnail list: Delete highlighted picture (0 146).  
O
Change protect  
status of highlighted  
photo  
See page 143 for more information.  
A (L)  
   
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom  
Press the X button to zoom in on the image displayed in full-frame playback or on the  
image currently highlighted in thumbnail or calendar playback. The following  
operations can be performed while zoom is in effect:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press X to zoom in to maximum of  
approximately 33× (large images), 25×  
(medium images) or 13× (small  
Zoom in or out  
X / W (Q)  
images). Press W (Q) to zoom out.  
While photo is zoomed in, use multi  
selector to view areas of image not  
visible in monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly  
to other areas of frame. Navigation window is displayed when  
zoom ratio is altered; area currently visible in monitor is  
indicated by yellow border.  
View other  
areas of image  
Faces (up to 35) detected during zoom  
are indicated by white borders in  
Select/zoom in  
on or out from  
faces  
navigation window. Press P and use  
the multi selector to view other faces,  
or press J to zoom in on the currently  
selected face. Press P again to return to  
normal zoom.  
P
Rotate command dial to view same location in other images at  
current zoom ratio. Playback zoom is cancelled when a  
movie is displayed.  
View other  
images  
Cancel zoom  
Cancel zoom and return to full-frame playback.  
See page 143 for more information.  
Changeprotect  
status  
A (L)  
     
Protecting Photographs from Deletion  
In full-frame, zoom, thumbnail, and calendar playback, the A (L) button can be  
used to protect photographs from accidental deletion. Protected files can not be  
deleted using the O button or the Delete option in the playback menu. Note that  
protected images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted (0 196).  
To protect a photograph:  
1 Select an image.  
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the  
thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar playback.  
Full-frame playback  
Thumbnail playback  
2 Press the A (L) button.  
The photograph will be marked with a P  
icon.  
A (L) button  
A Removing Protection  
To remove protection from individual pictures so that they can be deleted, display pictures  
full-frame or highlight them in the thumbnail list and then press the A (L) button. To  
remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the Playback  
folder menu (0 175), press the A (L) and O buttons together for about two seconds  
during playback.  
   
Rating Pictures  
Rate pictures or mark them as candidates for later deletion. Rating is not available  
with protected images.  
Rating Individual Pictures  
1 Select an image.  
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the  
thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar playback.  
2 Display playback options.  
Press the P button to display playback  
options.  
P button  
3 Select Rating.  
Highlight Rating and press J.  
4 Choose a rating.  
Press 4 or 2 to choose a rating of from zero  
to five stars, or select ) to mark the picture  
as a candidate for later deletion.  
5 Press J.  
Press J to complete the operation.  
     
Rating Multiple Pictures  
Use the Rating option in the playback menu to rate multiple pictures.  
1 Select Rating.  
Press the G button to display the camera  
menus, then highlight Rating in the  
playback menu and press 2.  
G button  
2 Rate pictures.  
Press 4 or 2 to highlight pictures (to view  
the currently highlighted picture full frame,  
press and hold the X button) and press 1 or  
3 to choose a rating of from zero to five  
stars, or select ) to mark the picture as a  
candidate for later deletion.  
3 Press J.  
Press J to complete the operation.  
   
Deleting Photographs  
Unprotected photographs can be deleted as described below. Once deleted,  
photographs can not be recovered.  
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback  
1 Select an image.  
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar  
playback.  
2 Press the O button.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
O button  
Full-frame playback  
Thumbnail playback  
3 Press the O button again.  
To delete the photograph, press the O  
button again. To exit without deleting the  
photograph, press the K button.  
A Calendar Playback  
During calendar playback, you can delete all photographs taken on a selected date by  
highlighting the date in the date list and pressing the O button (0 141).  
       
The Playback Menu  
The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following options. Note that  
depending on the number of images, some time may be required for deletion.  
Option  
Description  
Q Selected  
Delete selected pictures.  
n Select date Delete all pictures taken on a selected date.  
R All  
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for playback (0 175).  
Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs  
1 Select Delete.  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight Delete in the playback menu and  
press 2.  
G button  
2 Choose Selected.  
Highlight Selected and press 2.  
3 Highlight a picture.  
Use the multi selector to highlight a picture  
(to view the highlighted picture full screen,  
press and hold the X button).  
4 Select the highlighted picture.  
Press the W (Q) button to select the  
highlighted picture. Selected pictures are  
marked by a O icon. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to  
select additional pictures; to deselect a  
picture, highlight it and press W (Q).  
W (Q) button  
5 Press J to complete the operation.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;  
highlight Yes and press J.  
       
Select Date: Deleting Photographs Taken on a Selected Date  
1 Choose Select Date.  
In the delete menu, highlight Select date  
and press 2.  
2 Highlight a date.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a date.  
To view the pictures taken on the  
highlighted date, press W (Q). Use the multi  
selector to scroll through the pictures, or  
press and hold X to view the current picture  
full screen. Press W (Q) to return to the date  
W (Q) button  
list.  
3 Select the highlighted date.  
Press 2 to select all pictures taken on the  
highlighted date. Selected dates are  
indicated by check marks. Repeat steps 2  
and 3 to select additional dates; to deselect a  
date, highlight it and press 2.  
4 Press J to complete the operation.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;  
highlight Yes and press J.  
Slide Shows  
The Slide show option in the playback menu is used to display a slide show of the  
pictures in the current playback folder (0 175).  
1 Select Slide show.  
To display the slide show menu, press the  
G button and select Slide show in the  
playback menu.  
G button  
2 Start the slide show.  
Highlight Start in the slide show menu and  
press J.  
The following operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press 4 to return to previous frame, 2 to skip  
to next frame.  
Skip back/skip ahead  
View additional photo info  
Pause/resume slide show  
Change photo info displayed (0 136).  
Pause show. Press again to resume.  
Press X during movie playback to increase  
volume, W (Q) to decrease.  
Raise/lower volume  
X / W (Q)  
Exit to playback mode  
End show and return to playback mode.  
K
The dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends.  
Select Restart to restart or Exit to return to the playback menu.  
     
Slide Show Options  
Before starting a slide show, you can use the options in the slide show menu to select  
the images displayed by type or rating and choose how long each image is displayed.  
Image type: Choose from Still images and movies, Still  
images only, Movies only, and By rating. To include only  
pictures with selected ratings, highlight By rating and press  
2. A list of ratings will be displayed; highlight ratings and  
press 2 to select or deselect pictures with the highlighted  
rating for inclusion in the slide show. Selected ratings are  
indicated by a check mark. Press J to exit when the desired  
ratings are selected.  
Frame interval: Choose how long still images are displayed.  
     
Connections  
Installing ViewNX 2  
Install the supplied software to display and  
edit photographs and movies that have  
been copied to your computer. Before  
installing ViewNX 2, confirm that your  
computer meets the system requirements  
on page 152. Be sure to use the latest  
version of ViewNX 2, which is available for  
download from the websites listed on page  
xiv, as earlier versions that do not support  
the D5300 may fail to transfer NEF (RAW)  
images correctly.  
ViewNX 2TM  
Your Imaging Toolbox  
1 Launch the installer.  
q Select region (if required)  
Start the computer, insert the installer  
CD, and launch the installer. A  
language selection dialog will be  
displayed. If the desired language is  
not available, click Region Selection  
to choose a different region (region  
selection is not available in the  
European release).  
w Select  
language  
e Click  
Next  
2 Start the installer.  
Click Install and follow the on-screen instructions.  
Click Install  
     
3 Exit the installer.  
Windows  
Mac OS  
Click Yes  
Click OK  
4 Remove the installer CD from the CD-ROM drive.  
A System Requirements  
Windows  
Mac OS  
Photos: Intel Celeron, Pentium 4, Core Series;  
1.6 GHz or better  
Photos: Intel Core or Xeon series  
Movies (playback): Core Duo 2 GHz or better;  
Intel Core i5 or better recommended when  
viewing movies with a frame size of  
1280×720 or more at a frame rate of 30 fps  
or above or movies with a frame size of  
1920×1080 or more  
Movies (playback): 3.0 GHz or better  
Pentium D; Intel Core i5 or better  
recommended when viewing movies with  
a frame size of 1280×720 or more at a  
frame rate of 30 fps or above or movies  
with a frame size of 1920×1080 or more  
Movies (editing): Intel Core i5 or better  
Pre-installed versions of Windows 8,  
Windows 7, Windows Vista, and Windows XP;  
note that 64-bit versions of Windows XP are  
not supported  
CPU  
OS  
Movies (editing): Intel Core i5 or better  
OS X 10.8 or 10.7, Mac OS X 10.6  
32-bit Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista:  
1 GB or more (2 GB or more recommended)  
Memory 64-bit Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista:  
OS X 10.8, 10.7: 2 GB or more (4 GB or more  
recommended)  
(RAM)  
2 GB or more (4 GB or more recommended)  
Windows XP: 512 MB or more (2 GB or more  
recommended)  
Mac OS X 10.6: 1 GB or more (4 GB or more  
recommended)  
Hard disk  
space  
A minimum of 1 GB available on the startup disk (3 GB or more recommended)  
Resolution: 1024×768 pixels (XGA) or more Resolution: 1024×768 pixels (XGA) or more  
Graphics (1280×1024 pixels or more recommended)  
(1280×1024 pixels or more recommended)  
Color: 24-bit color (True Color) or more  
Color: 24-bit color (millions of colors) or more  
See the websites listed on page xiv for the latest information on supported operating systems.  
   
Using ViewNX 2  
Copy Pictures to the Computer  
Before proceeding, be sure you have installed the software on the supplied ViewNX 2  
CD (0 151).  
1 Connect the USB cable.  
After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory card is inserted,  
connect the supplied USB cable as shown and then turn the camera on.  
A Use a Reliable Power Source  
To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully  
charged.  
A Connecting Cables  
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables. Do  
not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle. Close the connector  
cover when the connector is not in use.  
A USB Hubs  
Transfer may not proceed as expected if the camera is connected via a USB hub or  
keyboard.  
2 Start Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX 2.  
If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program, select  
Nikon Transfer 2.  
A Windows 7  
If the following dialog is displayed, select Nikon Transfer 2 as described below.  
1 Under Import pictures and videos, click  
Change program. A program selection dialog  
will be displayed; select Import File using  
Nikon Transfer 2 and click OK.  
2 Double-click Import File.  
           
3 Click Start Transfer.  
At default settings, pictures on the memory  
card will be copied to the computer.  
A During Transfer  
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the  
USB cable while transfer is in progress.  
Start Transfer  
4 Terminate the connection.  
When transfer is complete, turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable.  
View Pictures  
Pictures are displayed in ViewNX 2 when transfer is  
complete.  
A Starting ViewNX 2 Manually  
Windows: Double-click the ViewNX 2 shortcut on  
the desktop.  
Mac OS: Click the ViewNX 2 icon in the Dock.  
Retouching Photographs  
To crop pictures and perform such tasks as adjusting sharpness  
and tone levels, click the Edit button in the ViewNX 2 toolbar.  
Editing Movies  
To perform such tasks as trimming unwanted footage from  
movies shot with the camera, click the Movie Editor button in  
the ViewNX 2 toolbar.  
Printing Pictures  
Click the Print button in the ViewNX 2 toolbar. A dialog will be  
displayed, allowing you to print pictures on a printer connected  
to the computer.  
Viewing Location Data  
To view the locations where pictures were taken or display track  
logs, click the Map button in the ViewNX 2 toolbar.  
   
A For More Information  
Consult online help for more information on using  
ViewNX 2.  
A Viewing the Nikon Website  
To visit the Nikon website after installing ViewNX 2, select All Programs > Link to Nikon  
from the Windows start menu (Internet connection required).  
Printing Photographs  
Selected JPEG images can be printed on a PictBridge printer (0 271) connected  
directly to the camera.  
Connecting the Printer  
Connect the camera using the supplied USB cable.  
1 Turn the camera off.  
2 Connect the USB cable.  
Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown. Do not use force or  
attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.  
3 Turn the camera on.  
A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor, followed by a PictBridge  
playback display.  
D Selecting Photographs for Printing  
NEF (RAW) photographs (0 59) can not be selected for printing. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)  
images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu  
(0 213).  
             
Printing Pictures One at a Time  
1 Select a picture.  
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures. Press the X  
button to zoom in on the current frame (0 142; press K to  
exit zoom). To view six pictures at a time, press the W (Q)  
button. Use the multi selector to highlight pictures, or  
press X to display the highlighted picture full frame.  
2 Display printing options.  
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.  
3 Adjust printing options.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option and press 2 to select.  
Option  
Description  
Highlight a page size (only sizes supported by the current printer are listed)  
Page size and press J to select and exit to the previous menu (to print at the default  
page size for the current printer, select Printer default).  
No. of Press 1 or 3 to choose number of copies (maximum 99), then press J to  
copies select and return to the previous menu.  
This option is available only if supported by the printer. Highlight Printer  
default (use current printer settings), Print with border (print photo with  
white border), or No border and press J to select and exit to the previous  
Border  
menu.  
Highlight Printer default (use current printer settings), Print time stamp  
(print times and dates of recording on photos), or No time stamp and press J  
to select and exit to the previous menu.  
Time  
stamp  
This option is available only if supported by the printer. To exit without  
cropping, highlight No cropping and press J. To crop the current picture,  
highlight Crop and press 2.  
A crop selection dialog will be displayed; press X to increase the size of the  
Cropping  
crop, W (Q) to decrease. Position the crop using the multi selector and press  
J. Note that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at large sizes.  
         
4 Start printing.  
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To  
cancel before all copies have been printed, press J.  
D Date Imprint  
If you select Print time stamp in the PictBridge menu when printing photographs  
containing date information recorded using Custom Setting d6 (Print date; 0 190), the date  
will appear twice. The imprinted date may however be cropped out if the photographs are  
cropped or printed without a border.  
 
Printing Multiple Pictures  
1 Display the PictBridge menu.  
Press the G button in the PictBridge playback display  
G button  
2 Choose an option.  
Highlight one of the following options and press 2.  
Print select: Select pictures for printing.  
Select date: Print one copy of all the pictures taken on a  
selected date.  
Print (DPOF): Print an existing print order created with the DPOF print order  
option in the playback menu (0 162). The current print order will be  
displayed in Step 3.  
Index print: To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card,  
proceed to Step 4. Note that if the memory card contains more than 256  
pictures, only the first 256 images will be printed.  
   
3 Select pictures or choose a date.  
If you chose Print select or Print (DPOF) in Step 2, press 4 or  
2 to scroll through the pictures on the memory card. To  
display the current picture full screen, press and hold the X  
button. To select the current picture for printing, press 1.  
The picture will be marked with a Z icon and the number  
of prints will be set to 1; press 1 or 3 to specify the  
number of prints (up to 99; to deselect the picture, press 3  
when the number of prints is 1).  
X button: View photo full  
screen  
If you chose Select date in Step 2, press 1 or 3 to highlight a  
date and press 2 to toggle the highlighted date on or off.  
To view the pictures taken on the selected date, press W  
(Q). Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures, or  
press and hold X to view the current picture full screen.  
Press W (Q) again to return to the date selection dialog.  
Xbutton: View highlighted  
photo full screen  
W (Q) button: View  
photos for selected date  
4 Display printing options.  
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.  
5 Adjust printing options.  
Choose page size, border, and time stamp options as described on page 157 (a  
warning will be displayed if the selected page size is too small for an index  
print).  
6 Start printing.  
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To  
cancel before all copies have been printed, press J.  
 
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set  
The DPOF print order option in the playback menu is used to create digital “print  
orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers and devices that support DPOF.  
1 Choose Select/set for the DPOF print  
order item in the playback menu.  
Press the G button and select DPOF print  
order in the playback menu. Highlight  
Select/set and press 2 (to remove all  
photographs from the print order, select  
G button  
Deselect all).  
2 Select pictures.  
Press 4 or 2 to scroll through the pictures  
on the memory card. To display the current  
picture full screen, press and hold the X  
button. To select the current picture for  
printing, press 1. The picture will be marked  
with a Z icon and the number of prints will  
be set to 1; press 1 or 3 to specify the  
number of prints (up to 99; to deselect the  
picture, press 3 when the number of prints  
is 1). Continue until all the desired pictures  
have been selected.  
X button: View photo full screen  
3 Display imprint options.  
Press J to display data imprint options.  
     
4 Select imprint options.  
Highlight the following options and press 2  
to toggle the highlighted option on or off (to  
complete the print order without including  
this information, proceed to Step 5).  
Print shooting data: Print shutter speed and aperture on all pictures in print  
order.  
Print date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print order.  
5 Complete the print order.  
Press J to complete the print order.  
D DPOF Print Order  
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer, select  
Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to  
modify and print the current order (0 159). DPOF print date and shooting data options are  
not supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the date of recording on  
photographs in the current print order, use the PictBridge Time stamp option.  
The DPOF print order option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory  
card to store the print order.  
NEF (RAW) photographs (0 59) can not be selected using this option. JPEG copies of NEF  
(RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu  
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer or other device  
after the print order is created.  
 
Viewing Pictures on TV  
The supplied audio video (A/V) cable can be used to connect the camera to a  
television or video recorder for playback or recording. A High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface (HDMI) cable (available separately from third-party suppliers) with a mini  
HDMI connector (Type C) can be used to connect the camera to high-definition video  
devices.  
Standard Definition Devices  
Before connecting the camera to a standard television, confirm that the camera  
video standard (0 202) matches that used in the TV.  
1 Turn the camera off.  
Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the A/V cable.  
2 Connect the A/V cable as shown.  
Audio (red)  
Audio (white)  
Video (yellow)  
Connect to camera  
Connect to video device  
3 Tune the television to the video channel.  
4 Turn the camera on and press the K button.  
During playback, images will be displayed on the television screen. Note that  
the edges of images may not be displayed.  
A Video Mode  
If no image is displayed, check that camera is correctly connected and that the option  
selected for Video mode (0 202) matches the video standard used in the TV.  
A Television Playback  
Use of an AC adapter (available separately) is recommended for extended playback.  
         
High-Definition Devices  
The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a third-party HDMI cable with a  
mini HDMI connector (Type C).  
1 Turn the camera off.  
Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable.  
2 Connect the HDMI cable as shown.  
Connect to camera  
Connect to high-definition device  
(choose cable with connector for HDMI device)  
3 Tune the device to the HDMI channel.  
4 Turn the camera on and press the K button.  
During playback, images will be displayed on the high-definition television or  
monitor screen. Note that the edges of images may not be displayed.  
A Playback Volume  
Volume can be adjusted using television controls; the camera controls can not be used.  
     
Choosing an Output Resolution  
To choose the format for images output to the HDMI device,  
select HDMI > Output resolution in the camera setup menu  
(0 195). If Auto is selected, the camera will automatically select  
the appropriate format.  
Controlling the Camera with the TV Remote  
If On is selected for HDMI >Device control in the setup menu (0 195) when the  
camera is connected to a television that supports HDMI-CEC and both the camera  
and television are on, the television remote can be used in place of the camera multi  
selector and J button during full-frame playback and slide shows. If Off is selected,  
the television remote can not be used to control the camera, but the camera can be  
used to shoot photographs and movies in live view.  
A HDMI-CEC Devices  
HDMI-CEC (High-Definition Multimedia Interface–Consumer Electronics Control) is a  
standard that allows HDMI devices to be used to control peripherals to which they are  
connected. When the camera is connected to an HDMI-CEC device, ) will appear in the  
viewfinder in place of the number of exposures remaining.  
A 1920 × 1080 60p/50p  
Selecting 1920 × 1080; 60p or 1920 × 1080; 50p for Movie settings > Frame size/frame  
rate may cause variations in the resolution and frame rate of the data output to HDMI  
devices during recording. During playback (0 130), HDMI devices will display the movie  
only; indicators will not be displayed.  
D HDMI > Output Resolution  
Movies can not be output at resolutions of 1920 × 1080; 60p or 1920 × 1080; 50p. Some  
devices may not support an Output resolution setting of Auto; in this case, select 1080i  
(interlaced).  
       
Wi-Fi  
What Wi-Fi Can Do for You  
Install the Wireless Mobile Utility app on your Android and iOS device to display the  
view through the camera lens on the smart device, take pictures and control the  
camera remotely, and download pictures from the camera for sharing via the  
Internet.  
Download pictures  
Share pictures  
Remote control  
See the Wireless Mobile Utility manual for details (0 168).  
Wi-Fi 167  
       
Accessing the Camera  
Before connecting via Wi-Fi (wireless LAN), install the Wireless Mobile Utility on your  
Android or iOS smart device. Instructions for accessing the camera vary with the type  
of connection used by the smart device.  
Android  
Push-button WPS: If the smart device supports push-button WPS (i.e., has a WPS  
button connection option in its Wi-Fi settings menu), you can use this easy  
method to connect to the smart device (0 169)  
PIN-entry WPS: If the smart device supports WPS, you can use the camera to establish  
a connection by entering the PIN displayed by the smart device (0 170)  
View SSID: If the smart device does not support WPS, you can connect by selecting  
the camera SSID on the smart device (0 171)  
iOS  
View SSID: Connect by selecting the camera SSID on the smart device (0 171)  
A Installing the App  
1 Find the app.  
On the smart device, connect to the Google Play service, the App Store, or another app  
marketplace and search for “Wireless Mobile Utility. For more information, see the  
instructions provided with the smart device.  
2 Install the app.  
Read the app description and install the app. A pdf manual for the Wireless Mobile Utility  
is available for download at the following URLs:  
Android: http://nikonimglib.com/ManDL/WMAU/  
iOS: http://nikonimglib.com/ManDL/WMAU-ios/  
A WPS  
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard designed to make it easy to establish a secure  
wireless network. For information on the steps involved and the length of time the smart  
device will wait for a connection, see the documentation supplied with the smart device.  
     
WPS (Android Only)  
1 Enable the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi.  
Press the G button to display the menus,  
then highlight Wi-Fi in the setup menu and  
press 2. Highlight Network connection  
and press 2, then highlight Enable and  
press J. Wait a few seconds for Wi-Fi to  
activate.  
G button  
2 Connect.  
Enable WPS button connections on the camera and smart device:  
Camera: Highlight Network settings and  
press 2.  
Highlight Push-button WPS and press 2  
to ready the camera for a WPS connection.  
The camera will wait about two minutes  
for a WPS connection request from the  
smart device. To extend the wait time,  
press J.  
Smart device: Select Wi-Fi settings > WPS button connection.  
3 Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility.  
Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility on the smart device. The main dialog will be  
displayed.  
Wi-Fi 169  
     
PIN Entry (Android Only)  
1 Enable the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi.  
Press the G button to display the menus,  
then highlight Wi-Fi in the setup menu and  
press 2. Highlight Network connection  
and press 2, then highlight Enable and  
press J. Wait a few seconds for Wi-Fi to  
activate.  
G button  
2 Select Network settings > PIN-entry WPS.  
Highlight Network settings and press 2.  
Highlight PIN-entry WPS and press 2.  
3 Enter the PIN.  
Enter the PIN displayed by the smart device. Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits  
and press 1 or 3 to change. Press J when entry is complete.  
4 Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility.  
Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility on the smart device. The main dialog will be  
displayed.  
   
SSID (Android and iOS)  
1 Enable the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi.  
Press the G button to display the menus,  
then highlight Wi-Fi in the setup menu and  
press 2. Highlight Network connection  
and press 2, then highlight Enable and  
press J. Wait a few seconds for Wi-Fi to  
activate.  
G button  
2 Display the camera SSID.  
Highlight Network settings and press 2.  
Highlight View SSID and press 2.  
3 Select the camera SSID.  
Select the camera SSID in the list of networks displayed by the smart device.  
4 Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility.  
Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility on the smart device. The main dialog will be  
displayed.  
Wi-Fi 171  
     
Terminating the Connection  
Wi-Fi can be disabled by:  
Selecting Wi-Fi > Network connection > Disable in the camera setup menu  
Starting movie recording  
Turning the camera off  
Restoring Default Settings  
To restore default network settings, select Wi-Fi > Network settings > Reset  
network settings. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight Yes and press  
J to restore default network settings.  
A The Wi-Fi Display  
While Wi-Fi is enabled, a c icon will flash in the information display.  
The icon will stop flashing once a connection has been established  
and the camera is exchanging data with the smart device.  
D Wi-Fi  
Read the warnings on pages xvi to xviii before using the Wi-Fi function. To disable Wi-Fi in  
settings in which its use is prohibited, select Wi-Fi > Network connection > Disable in the  
camera setup menu. Note that Eye-Fi cards can not be used while Wi-Fi is enabled and that  
the standby timer will not turn off while the Wireless Mobile Utility app on the smart device  
is communicating with the camera. If no data are exchanged for about 5 minutes, the  
standby timer will turn off. The camera Wi-Fi function is only available when a memory card  
is inserted and can not be used when a USB or HDMI cable is connected. To prevent loss of  
power while connected, charge the battery before enabling the network connection.  
   
Selecting Pictures for Upload  
Follow the steps below to select photos for upload to the smart device. Movies can  
not be selected for upload.  
Selecting Individual Pictures for Upload  
1 Select an image.  
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar  
playback.  
2 Display playback options.  
Press the P button  
P button  
3 Choose Select to send to smart device/  
deselect.  
Highlight Select to send to smart device/  
deselect and press J. Pictures selected for  
upload are indicated by a & icon; to  
deselect, display or highlight the image and  
repeat Steps 2 and 3.  
A The & Icon  
The & icon will no longer be displayed when upload is complete.  
Wi-Fi 173  
       
Selecting Multiple Pictures for Upload  
To change the upload status of multiple pictures, use the Select to send to smart  
device option in the playback menu.  
1 Choose Select to send to smart device.  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight Select to send to smart device in  
the playback menu and press 2.  
G button  
2 Select pictures.  
Use the multi selector to highlight pictures  
and press W (Q) to select or deselect (to  
view the highlighted picture full screen,  
press and hold the X button). Selected  
W (Q) button  
pictures are marked by a & icon.  
3 Press J.  
Press J to complete the operation.  
   
Camera Menus  
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images  
To display the playback menu, press G and select the D (playback menu) tab.  
G button  
The playback menu contains the following options:  
Option  
Default  
0
Delete  
Current  
On  
Playback folder  
Playback display options  
Image review  
Rotate tall  
On  
Slide show  
Image type  
Still images and movies  
Frame interval  
DPOF print order  
Rating  
2 s  
Select to send to smart device  
G button D playback menu  
Playback Folder  
Choose a folder for playback:  
Option  
Description  
Only photos in the folder currently selected for Storage folder in the shooting  
Current menu (0 178) are displayed during playback. This option is selected automatically  
when a photo is taken; select All to view pictures in all folders.  
All  
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.  
           
G button D playback menu  
Playback Display Options  
Choose the information available in the playback photo  
information display (0 136). Press 1 or 3 to highlight and  
press 2 to select or deselect. Selected items are indicated by  
check marks. To return to the playback menu, press J.  
G button D playback menu  
Image Review  
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor immediately  
after shooting.  
G button D playback menu  
Rotate Tall  
If On is selected, “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures will be automatically rotated for  
display in the monitor (pictures taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation will  
still be displayed in landscape orientation; 0 202). Note that because the camera  
itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are not  
rotated automatically during image review.  
               
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options  
To display the shooting menu, press G and select the C (shooting menu) tab.  
G button  
The shooting menu contains the following options:  
Option  
Reset shooting menu  
Storage folder  
Image quality  
Image size  
Default  
JPEG normal  
Large  
12-bit  
Auto  
Cool-white  
fluorescent  
Standard  
Off  
sRGB  
0
Option  
Default  
0
177 Release mode  
178 m, w  
61 Multiple exposure  
178 Multiple exposure mode  
101 Number of shots  
Continuous H  
Single frame  
Other modes  
NEF (RAW) recording  
White balance  
Off  
2
On  
Off  
Auto gain  
Fluorescent  
Interval timer shooting  
Set Picture Control  
Manage Picture Control  
Auto distortion control  
Color space  
Movie settings  
Frame size/frame rate *  
Movie quality  
Microphone  
Wind noise reduction  
Manual movie settings  
Normal  
Auto sensitivity 128  
Active D-Lighting  
Auto  
Off  
Off  
Normal  
Off  
Off  
HDR (high dynamic range)  
Long exposure NR  
High ISO NR  
ISO sensitivity settings  
P, S , A , M  
Other modes  
Auto ISO sensitivity control  
100  
Auto  
Off  
ISO sensitivity  
* Default varies with country of purchase.  
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and unavailable.  
G button C shooting menu  
Reset Shooting Menu  
Select Yes to reset shooting menu settings.  
         
G button C shooting menu  
Storage Folder  
Create, rename, or delete folders, or choose the folder in which subsequent  
photographs will be stored.  
Select folder: Choose the folder in which subsequent photographs will be stored.  
Current folder  
D5300 (default folder)  
Other folders (in alphabetical  
order)  
New: Create a new folder and name it as described on page 116. Folder names can  
be up to five characters long.  
Rename: Select a folder from the list and rename it as described on page 116.  
Delete: Delete all empty folders on the memory card.  
D Folder Names  
On the memory card, folder names are preceded by a three-digit folder number assigned  
automatically by the camera (e.g., 100D5300). Each folder can contain up to 999  
photographs. During shooting, pictures are stored in the highest-numbered folder with the  
selected name. If a photograph is taken when the current folder is full or contains a  
photograph numbered 9999, the camera will create a new folder by adding 1 to the current  
folder number (e.g., 101D5300). The camera treats folders with the same name but different  
folder numbers as the same folder. For example, if the folder NIKON is selected for Storage  
folder, photographs in all folders named NIKON (100NIKON, 101NIKON, 102NIKON, etc.) will  
be visible when Current is selected for Playback folder (0 175). Renaming changes all  
folders with the same name but leaves the folder numbers intact. Selecting Delete deletes  
empty numbered folders but leaves other folders with the same name intact.  
G button C shooting menu  
NEF (RAW) Recording  
Choose the bit depth for NEF (RAW) images.  
Option  
Description  
(
)
12-bit  
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 12 bits.  
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits, producing larger  
files but increasing the amount of color data recorded.  
14-bit  
         
G button C shooting menu  
Auto Distortion Control  
Select On to reduce barrel distortion in photos taken with wide-  
angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion in photos  
taken with long lenses (note that the edges of the area visible in  
the viewfinder may be cropped out of the final photograph, and  
that the time needed to process photographs before recording  
begins may increase). This option does not apply to movies and is available only with  
type G, E, and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and certain other lenses excluded); results are not  
guaranteed with other lenses.  
G button C shooting menu  
Color Space  
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for  
color reproduction. sRGB is recommended for movies and for  
general-purpose printing and display, Adobe RGB, with its  
broader gamut of colors, for professional publication and  
commercial printing.  
A Adobe RGB  
For accurate color reproduction, Adobe RGB images require applications, displays, and  
printers that support color management.  
A Color Space  
ViewNX 2 (supplied) and Capture NX 2 (available separately) automatically select the correct  
color space when opening photographs created with this camera. Results can not be  
guaranteed with third-party software.  
           
G button C shooting menu  
Long Exposure NR  
If On is selected, photographs taken at shutter speeds slower  
than 1 s will be processed to reduce noise (bright spots,  
randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog). The time required for  
processing roughly doubles; during processing, “l m” will flash in the viewfinder  
and pictures can not be taken (noise reduction will not be performed if the camera is  
turned off before processing is complete).  
G button C shooting menu  
High ISO NR  
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce “noise.”  
Option  
High  
Description  
Reduce noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, lines, or fog), particularly in  
Normal photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities. Choose the amount of noise reduction  
performed from High, Normal, and Low.  
Low  
Noise reduction is only performed as required. The amount of noise reduction is  
less than the amount performed when Low is selected for High ISO NR.  
Off  
G button C shooting menu  
ISO Sensitivity Settings  
Adjust ISO sensitivity (0 67).  
           
Auto ISO Sensitivity control  
If Off is chosen for Auto ISO sensitivity control in P, S, A, and M modes, ISO sensitivity  
will remain fixed at the value selected by the user (0 67). When On is chosen, ISO  
sensitivity will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved at  
the value selected by the user. The maximum value for auto ISO sensitivity can be  
selected using the Maximum sensitivity option in the Auto ISO sensitivity control  
menu (choose lower values to prevent noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or  
lines, but note that if the ISO sensitivity selected by the user is higher than that  
chosen for Maximum sensitivity, the value selected by the user will be used instead;  
the minimum value for auto ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 100)). In modes  
P and A, sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter  
speed selected for Minimum shutter speed (1/2000–1 s, or Auto; in modes S and M,  
sensitivity will be adjusted for optimal exposure at the shutter speed selected by the  
user). If Auto (available only with CPU lenses) is selected, the camera will choose the  
minimum shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens (auto shutter-speed  
selection can be fine-tuned by highlighting Auto and pressing 2). Slower shutter  
speeds will be used only if optimum exposure can not be achieved at the ISO  
sensitivity value selected for Maximum sensitivity.  
When On is selected, the viewfinder shows ISO-AUTO and the  
information display ISO-A. These indicators flash when  
sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user.  
A Maximum Sensitivity/Minimum Shutter Speed  
When auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled, the ISO sensitivity  
and shutter speed graphics in the information display show the  
maximum sensitivity and minimum shutter speed.  
Minimum shutter speed  
Maximum sensitivity  
A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control  
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) is more likely at higher sensitivities. Use  
the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise (0 180). Note that ISO  
sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO sensitivity control is used in  
combination with slow sync flash modes (available with the built-in flash and the optional  
flash units listed on page 232), possibly preventing the camera from selecting slow shutter  
speeds. Auto ISO sensitivity control is available only in i-TTL flash control mode (0 192, 233);  
in other modes, the value selected for ISO sensitivity will be used for pictures taken with the  
built-in flash or optional flash units.  
         
A Custom Settings:  
Fine-Tuning Camera Settings  
To display the Custom Settings menu, press G and select the A (Custom Settings  
menu) tab.  
G button  
Custom Setting groups  
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings  
to suit individual preferences.  
Main menu  
Reset custom  
settings (0 183)  
   
The following Custom Settings are available:  
Custom Setting  
Reset custom settings  
Default  
0
a
Autofocus  
a1 AF-C priority selection  
a2 Number of focus points  
a3 Built-in AF-assist illuminator  
a4 Rangefinder  
Focus  
39 points  
On  
Off  
b
Exposure  
b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl  
Timers/AE lock  
1/3 step  
c
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L  
c2 Auto off timers  
Off  
Normal  
c3 Self-timer  
Self-timer delay: 10 s; number of shots: 1 187  
c4 Remote on duration (ML-L3)  
1 min  
d
Shooting/display  
d1 Beep  
d2 Viewfinder grid display  
d3 ISO display  
d4 File number sequence  
d5 Exposure delay mode  
d6 Print date  
Low  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
e
Bracketing/flash  
e1 Flash cntrl for built-in flash  
e2 Auto bracketing set  
TTL  
AE bracketing  
f
Controls  
f1 Assign Fn button  
f2 Assign AE-L/AF-L button  
ISO sensitivity  
AE/AF lock  
Exposure compensation: U  
Shutter speed/aperture: U  
Release locked  
f3 Reverse dial rotation  
f4 Slot empty release lock  
f5 Reverse indicators  
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and unavailable.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
Reset Custom Settings  
Select Yes to restore Custom Settings to their default values.  
   
a: Autofocus  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a1: AF-C Priority Selection  
When AF-C is selected for viewfinder photography (0 51), this option controls  
whether photographs can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed  
(release priority) or only when the camera is in focus (focus priority).  
Option  
Release  
Focus  
Description  
G
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed.  
Photos can only be taken once the camera has focused.  
F
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a2: Number of Focus Points  
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-point selection.  
Option  
Description  
Choose from the 39 focus points shown at right.  
# 39 points  
Choose from the 11 focus points shown at right. Use  
for quick focus-point selection.  
A 11 points  
           
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a3: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator  
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist illuminator lights to assist  
the focus operation when lighting is poor.  
AF-assist illuminator  
Option  
Description  
The AF-assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor (for more information, see  
On  
The AF-assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation. The camera  
may not be able to focus using autofocus when lighting is poor.  
Off  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a4: Rangefinder  
Choose On to use the exposure indicator to determine whether the camera is  
correctly focused in manual focus mode (0 57; note that this function is not available  
in shooting mode M, when the exposure indicator instead shows whether the subject  
is correctly exposed).  
Indicator  
Description  
Indicator  
Description  
Focus point is slightly  
behind subject.  
Subject in focus.  
Focus point is slightly in  
front of subject.  
Focus point is well  
behind subject.  
Camera can not  
determine correct  
focus.  
Focus point is well in  
front of subject.  
A Using the Electronic Rangefinder  
The electronic rangefinder requires a lens with a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster. The  
desired results may not be achieved in situations in which the camera would be unable to  
focus using autofocus (0 52). The electronic rangefinder is not available during live view.  
       
b: Exposure  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl  
Select the increments used when making adjustments to  
shutter speed, aperture, exposure and flash compensation, and  
bracketing.  
c: Timers/AE Lock  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L  
If On is selected, exposure will lock when the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
c2: Auto off Timers  
This option determines how long the monitor remains on if no operations are  
performed during menu display and playback (Playback/menus), while  
photographs are displayed in the monitor after shooting (Image review), and during  
live view (Live view), and how long the standby timer, viewfinder, and information  
display remain on when no operations are performed (Standby timer). Choose  
shorter auto-off delays to reduce the drain on the battery.  
Option  
Description (all times are approximate)  
Auto off timers are set to the following values:  
Playback/menus  
20 s  
Image review  
Live view  
5 min.  
10 min.  
20 min.  
Standby timer  
4 s  
C Short  
D Normal  
E Long  
Short  
Normal  
Long  
4 s  
4 s  
20 s  
1 min.  
5 min.  
8 s  
1 min.  
Choose separate delays for Playback/menus, Image review, Live view, and  
Standby timer. When settings are complete, press J.  
F Custom  
A Auto off Timers  
The monitor and viewfinder will not turn off automatically when the camera is connected to  
a computer or printer via USB.  
                 
G button A Custom Settings menu  
c3: Self-Timer  
Choose the length of the shutter release delay and the number  
of shots taken.  
Self-timer delay: Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.  
Number of shots: Press 1 and 3 to choose the number of shots  
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed (from 1  
to 9; if a value other than 1 is selected, shots will be taken at  
intervals of about 4 seconds).  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
c4: Remote on Duration (ML-L3)  
Choose how long the camera will wait for a signal from the  
optional ML-L3 remote control before cancelling remote release  
mode. Choose shorter times for longer battery life. This setting  
applies only during viewfinder photography.  
d: Shooting/Display  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d1: Beep  
Choose the pitch (High or Low) of the beep that sounds when the camera focuses  
and in self-timer and remote-control modes. Select Off to prevent the beep from  
sounding.  
The current setting is shown in the information display: 3 is  
displayed when the beep is on, 2 when it is off.  
               
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d2: Viewfinder Grid Display  
Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in the viewfinder for reference when  
composing photographs (0 4).  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d3: ISO Display  
Select On to display ISO sensitivity in the viewfinder in place of the number of  
exposures remaining.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d4: File Number Sequence  
When a photograph is taken, the camera names the file by adding 1 to the last file  
number used. This option controls whether file numbering continues from the last  
number used when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a new  
memory card is inserted in the camera.  
Option  
Description  
When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or a new memory card  
inserted in the camera, file numbering continues from the last number used. If a  
On photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered  
9999, a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin again  
from 0001.  
File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created, the memory card is  
formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera. Note that a new folder  
is created automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder contains  
Off  
999 photographs.  
Resets the file numbering for On to 0001 and creates a new folder with the next  
photograph taken.  
Reset  
           
D File Number Sequence  
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph  
numbered 9999, the shutter-release button will be disabled and no further photographs can  
be taken. Choose Reset for Custom Setting d4 (File number sequence) and then either  
format the current memory card or insert a new memory card.  
A File Names  
Photographs are stored as image files with names of the form “DSC_nnnn.xxx,” where nnnn  
is a four-digit number between 0001 and 9999 assigned automatically in ascending order by  
the camera, and xxx is one of the following three-letter extensions: “NEF” for NEF (RAW)  
images, “JPG” for JPEG images, or “MOV” for movies. The NEF and JPEG files recorded at a  
setting of NEF (RAW)+JPEG have the same file names but different extensions. Copies  
created with image overlay (0 211) and movie edit options (0 131) have file names  
beginning with “DSC_” ; copies created with the other options in the retouch menu have file  
names beginning with “CSC” (e.g., “CSC_0001.JPG”). Images recorded with the Color space  
option in the shooting menu set to Adobe RGB (0 179) have names that begin with an  
underscore (e.g., “_DSC0001.JPG”).  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d5: Exposure Delay Mode  
In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures, select On to  
delay shutter release until about 1 s after the shutter-release button is pressed and  
the mirror is raised.  
     
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d6: Print Date  
Choose the date information imprinted on photographs as they are taken. Date  
imprints can not be added to or removed from existing photos.  
Option  
Off  
Description  
The time and date do not appear on photographs.  
The date or date and time are imprinted on  
photographs taken while this option is in  
effect.  
15.10.2013  
a
b
c
Date  
1155..1100..22001133 1100::02  
Date and time  
Date counter  
New photos are imprinted with a time stamp showing the number of  
days between the date of shooting and a selected date (see below).  
At settings other than Off, the selected option is indicated by a  
d icon in the information display.  
A Print Date  
The date is recorded in the order selected for Time zone and date (0 201). The imprinted  
data may be cropped out or rendered illegible in copies created when images are retouched  
(0 205). The date does not appear on NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG images.  
Date Counter  
Pictures taken while this option is in effect are imprinted with  
the number of days remaining until a future date or the number  
of days elapsed since a past date. Use it to track the growth of a  
child or count down the days until a birthday or wedding.  
02 / 20.10.2013  
02 / 24.10.2013  
Future date (two days remaining)  
Past date (two days elapsed)  
The camera offers three slots for storing dates.  
1 Enter the first date.  
The first time you select Date counter, you will be  
prompted to enter a date for the first slot. Enter a date  
using the multi selector and press J to exit to the date list.  
       
2 Enter additional dates or edit existing dates.  
To change a date or enter additional dates, highlight a slot,  
press 2, and enter a date as described above.  
3 Choose a date.  
Highlight a slot in the date list and press J.  
4 Choose a date counter format.  
Highlight Display options and press 2, then highlight a  
date format and press J.  
5 Exit the date counter menu.  
Press J to exit the date counter menu.  
e: Bracketing/Flash  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
e1: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash  
Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash in P, S, A, and M modes.  
Option  
Description  
1 TTL  
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting conditions.  
Choose a flash level. At full power, the built-in flash has  
a Guide Number of 13/43 (m/ft., ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F).  
2
Manual  
A Manual  
A Y icon flashes in the viewfinder and 0 flashes in the  
information display when Manual is selected and the flash is raised.  
A The SB-400 and SB-300  
When an optional SB-400 or SB-300 flash unit is attached and turned on, Flash cntrl for  
built-in flash changes to Optional flash, allowing the flash control mode for the optional  
flash unit to be selected from TTL and Manual.  
A TTL Flash Control  
The following types of flash control are supported when a CPU lens is used in combination  
with the built-in flash (0 62) or optional flash units (0 232).  
i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Information from the 2016-pixel RGB sensor is used to  
adjust flash output for a natural balance between the main subject and the background.  
Standard i-TTL Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted for the main subject; the  
brightness of the background is not taken into account.  
Standard i-TTL flash control is used with spot metering or when selected with the optional  
flash unit. i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used in all other cases.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
e2: Auto Bracketing Set  
Choose the setting (exposure, white balance, or Active D-Lighting) varied when  
bracketing is in effect (0 108).  
                     
f: Controls  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f1: Assign Fn Button  
Choose the role played by the Fn button.  
Fn button  
Option  
Description  
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to select  
image quality and size (0 59).  
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to select ISO  
sensitivity (0 67).  
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to select  
white balance (P, S, A, and M modes only; 0 101).  
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to select  
Active D-Lighting (P, S, A, and M modes only; 0 94).  
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to adjust  
HDR settings (P, S, A, and M modes only; 0 96).  
Image quality/size  
ISO sensitivity  
White balance  
Active D-Lighting  
HDR  
v
w
m
!
$
If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal, or JPEG basic, an  
NEF (RAW) copy will be recorded with the next picture taken after the  
Fn button is pressed. To exit without recording an NEF (RAW) copy,  
press the Fn button again. This option has no effect in the following  
special effects modes: %, g, ', (, 3, and ).  
+NEF (RAW)  
&
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to choose  
the bracketing increment (exposure and white balance bracketing) or  
to turn ADL bracketing on or off (P, S, A, and M modes only; 0 108).  
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to choose an  
AF-area mode (0 53).  
Auto bracketing  
AF-area mode  
t
"
Press the Fn button to display or hide the  
viewfinder framing grid.  
Viewfinder grid  
display  
'
Wi-Fi  
Press the Fn button to display the Wi-Fi menu (0 169).  
c
     
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button  
Choose the role played by the A (L) button.  
Option  
Description  
Focus and exposure lock while the A (L) button is  
pressed.  
AE/AF lock  
B
C
AE lock only Exposure locks while the A (L) button is pressed.  
A (L) button  
Exposure locks when the A (L) button is pressed,  
AE lock (Hold) and remains locked until the button is pressed a  
second time or the standby timer expires.  
E
AF lock only Focus locks while the A (L) button is pressed.  
F
The A (L) button initiates autofocus. The shutter-  
release button can not be used to focus.  
A
AF-ON  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f3: Reverse Dial Rotation  
Reverse the direction of rotation of the command dial when  
they are used to make adjustments to exposure or flash  
compensation (Exposure compensation) and/or shutter speed  
and aperture (Shutter speed/aperture). Highlight options and  
press 2 to select or deselect, then press J.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f4: Slot Empty Release Lock  
If Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only enabled when a  
memory card is inserted in the camera. Selecting Enable release allows the shutter  
to be released when no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be  
recorded (they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode).  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f5: Reverse Indicators  
If  
(V) is selected, the exposure indicators in the viewfinder and  
information display are displayed with positive values on the left and negative values  
on the right. Select  
(W) to display negative values on the left and  
positive values on the right.  
               
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
To display the setup menu, press G and select the B (setup menu) tab.  
G button  
The setup menu contains the following options:  
Option  
Format memory card  
Monitor brightness  
Info display format  
AUTO/SCENE/EFFECTS  
P/S/A/M  
Default  
0
0
Option  
Default  
0
196 Video mode 2  
196 HDMI  
Output resolution  
Device control  
Remote control  
Auto  
On  
Graphic design  
Graphic design  
On  
Auto info display  
Clean image sensor  
199 Remote shutter release  
Take photos  
Same as camera  
4 button  
Assign Fn button  
Clean at startup &  
Clean at startup/shutdown  
shutdown  
Auto  
Wi-Fi  
Lock mirror up for cleaning1  
Image Dust Off ref photo  
Flicker reduction  
Time zone and date 2  
Daylight saving time  
Language 2  
Auto image rotation  
Image comment  
Location data  
243 Network connection  
199 Network settings  
200 Eye-Fi upload 3  
Conformity marking  
201 Firmware version  
Disable  
Enable  
Off  
On  
Record location data  
GPS options  
Create log  
Off  
Log list  
1 Not available when battery is low.  
2 Default varies with country of purchase.  
3 Only available when compatible Eye-Fi memory card is inserted (0 204).  
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and unavailable.  
     
G button B setup menu  
Format Memory Card  
Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being formatted in other  
devices. Format the card as described below.  
D Formatting Memory Cards  
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain. Be sure to copy any  
photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before proceeding (0 153).  
1 Highlight Yes.  
To exit without formatting the memory card,  
highlight No and press J.  
2 Press J.  
A message will be displayed while the card is  
formatted. Do not remove the memory card or  
remove or disconnect the power source until  
formatting is complete.  
G button B setup menu  
Monitor Brightness  
Press 1 or 3 to choose monitor brightness. Choose higher  
values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced  
brightness.  
       
G button B setup menu  
Info Display Format  
Choose an information display format (0 6). Formats can be chosen separately for  
auto, scene, and special effects modes and for P, S, A, and M modes.  
Classic (0 198)  
Graphic (0 6)  
1 Select a shooting mode option.  
Highlight AUTO/SCENE/EFFECTS or P/S/A/M  
and press 2.  
2 Select a design.  
Highlight a design and press J.  
   
The “Classic” display is shown below.  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10  
12 13 14  
15  
16  
17  
22 21 20 19  
18  
11  
23 24 25 26 27 28 29  
36 35 34 33 32 31 30  
1 Eye-Fi connection  
indicator............................. 204  
2 Wi-Fi connection  
14 Shutter speed.........................83 24 Image size............................... 61  
15 Aperture (f-number).............83 25 Bracketing increment ........109  
16 Exposure indicator ................87 26 HDR (High Dynamic  
indicator............................. 172  
3 Track log indicator ................ 77  
4 Satellite signal indicator...... 75  
5 Exposure delay mode ........ 189  
6 Multiple exposure  
indicator............................. 100  
7 Print date indicator............. 190  
8 Flash control indicator....... 192  
Flash compensation indicator  
for optional flash units ... 235  
9 “Beep” indicator .................. 187  
10 Battery indicator ................... 16  
11 Help icon...........................8, 256  
12 Shooting mode  
Exposure compensation  
indicator ...............................92  
Bracketing progress  
Range) .................................. 96  
27 Active D-Lighting.................. 94  
28 White balance......................101  
29 ISO sensitivity........................ 67  
30 Exposure compensation...... 92  
31 Flash compensation ............. 93  
32 Flash mode ............................. 63  
33 Metering.................................. 90  
34 AF-area mode ............... 53, 120  
35 Focus mode ................... 51, 119  
36 Picture Control ....................111  
indicator .............................110  
17 “k” (appears when memory  
remains for over 1000  
exposures)............................15  
18 Number of exposures  
remaining.............................15  
White balance recording  
indicator ............................104  
Capture mode indicator  
19 ISO sensitivity ........................ 67  
Auto ISO sensitivity  
indicator .............................181  
20 Bracketing indicator ...........108  
ADL bracketing amount ...110  
21 Release mode.........................45  
22 Auto-area AF indicator.........53  
3D-tracking indicator ...........53  
Focus point..............................55  
23 Image quality .........................59  
i auto/  
j auto (flash off).............. 19  
Scene modes...................... 30  
Special effects mode........ 37  
P, S, A, and M modes.......... 82  
13 Autoexposure (AE) lock  
indicator............................... 91  
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.  
 
G button B setup menu  
Auto Info Display  
If On is selected, the information display will appear after the shutter-release button  
is pressed halfway. If Off is selected, the information display can be viewed by  
pressing the R button.  
G button B setup menu  
Image Dust Off Ref Photo  
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 (available  
separately; for more information, see the Capture NX 2 manual).  
Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is mounted on the  
camera. A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended. When using a  
zoom lens, zoom all the way in.  
1 Choose a start option.  
Highlight one of the following options and press  
J. To exit without acquiring image dust off  
data, press G.  
Start: The message shown at right will be  
displayed and “rEF” will appear in the  
viewfinder.  
Clean sensor and then start: Select this option to  
clean the image sensor before starting. The  
message shown at right will be displayed and  
“rEF” will appear in the viewfinder when  
cleaning is complete.  
D Image Sensor Cleaning  
Image Dust Off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed  
can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed.  
Select Clean sensor and then start only if the Image Dust Off reference data will not  
be used with existing photographs.  
2 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.  
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-lit, featureless  
white object, frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the  
shutter-release button halfway.  
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity; in manual focus  
mode, set focus to infinity manually.  
         
3 Acquire Image Dust Off reference data.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust  
Off reference data.  
If the reference object is too bright or too dark,  
the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust  
Off reference data and the message shown at  
right will be displayed. Choose another reference  
object and repeat the process from step 1.  
D Image Dust Off Reference Data  
The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with  
different lenses or at different apertures. Reference images can not  
be viewed using computer imaging software. A grid pattern is  
displayed when reference images are viewed on the camera.  
G button B setup menu  
Flicker Reduction  
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting under fluorescent or mercury-vapor  
lighting during live view (0 118) or movie recording (0 126). Choose Auto to allow  
the camera to automatically choose the correct frequency, or manually match the  
frequency to that of the local AC power supply.  
A Flicker Reduction  
If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the frequency of the local  
power supply, test both options and choose the one that produces the best results. Flicker  
reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright, in which case you  
should select mode A or M and choose a smaller aperture (higher f-number) before starting  
live view. Note that flicker reduction is not available when On is selected for Movie settings  
> Manual movie settings (0 129) in mode M.  
   
G button B setup menu  
Time Zone and Date  
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date  
display order, and turn daylight saving time on or off.  
Option  
Description  
Choose a time zone. The camera clock is  
automatically set to the time in the new time zone.  
Time zone  
Set the camera clock (0 14).  
Date and time  
Date format  
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year  
are displayed.  
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock  
will automatically be advanced or set back one hour.  
Daylight  
saving time  
G button B setup menu  
Language  
Choose a language for camera menus and messages.  
                 
G button B setup menu  
Auto Image Rotation  
Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on camera orientation,  
allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback or when viewed in  
ViewNX 2 or Capture NX 2 (available separately). The following orientations are  
recorded:  
Landscape (wide) orientation Camera rotated 90° clockwise  
Camera rotated 90°  
counterclockwise  
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected. Choose this option when  
panning or taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down.  
A Rotate Tall  
To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for display during playback,  
select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu (0 176).  
G button B setup menu  
Image Comment  
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can be viewed as  
metadata in ViewNX 2 (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 236). The  
comment is also visible on the shooting data page in the photo information display  
(0 138). The following options are available:  
Input comment: Input a comment as described on page 116. Comments can be up to  
36 characters long.  
Attach comment: Select this option to attach the comment to all  
subsequent photographs. Attach comment can be turned  
on and off by highlighting it and pressing 2. After choosing  
the desired setting, press J to exit.  
G button B setup menu  
Video Mode  
When connecting the camera to a television or VCR, be sure the camera video mode  
matches the device video standard (NTSC or PAL).  
           
G button B setup menu  
Remote Control  
Choose the functions performed using a remote cord or wireless remote controller.  
Remote Shutter Release  
Choose whether the shutter-release button on the optional accessory is used for  
photography or movie recording.  
Option  
Description  
The shutter-release button on the optional accessory is used to take  
photographs.  
y Take photos  
The shutter-release button on the optional accessory is used for  
movie recording. Press the button halfway to start live view or to  
focus in AF-S and AF-F modes. Press the button all the way down to  
start or end recording. Use the camera live view switch to end live  
view.  
z Record movies  
Assign Fn button  
Choose the role played by the Fn buttons on wireless remote controllers.  
Option Description  
Same as camera The Fn button on the wireless remote controller performs the  
=4  
4 button  
function currently assigned to the camera A (L) button (0 194).  
The Fn button on the wireless remote controller can be used to start  
and end live view.  
a
Live view  
     
G button B setup menu  
Eye-Fi Upload  
This option is displayed only when an Eye-Fi memory card (available separately from  
third-party suppliers) is inserted in the camera. Choose Enable to upload  
photographs to a preselected destination. Note that pictures will not be uploaded if  
signal strength is insufficient.  
Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices and choose Disable where  
wireless devices are prohibited.  
When an Eye-Fi card is inserted, its status is indicated by an icon  
in the information display:  
d: Eye-Fi upload disabled.  
e: Eye-Fi upload enabled but no pictures available for  
upload.  
f (static): Eye-Fi upload enabled; waiting to begin upload.  
f (animated): Eye-Fi upload enabled; uploading data.  
g: Error.  
D Eye-Fi Cards  
Whether due to errors or other causes, Eye-Fi cards may emit wireless signals when Disable  
is selected. If a warning is displayed in the monitor (0 256), turn the camera off and remove  
the card.  
The camera can be used to turn Eye-Fi cards on and off, but may not support other Eye-Fi  
functions. Be sure to keep the card firmware updated. See the documentation provided with  
the Eye-Fi card for more information; for information on the availability of Eye-Fi cards in  
your country or region, contact the manufacturer.  
A Using Eye-Fi Cards in Ad Hoc Mode  
Additional time may be required when connecting using Eye-Fi cards that support ad hoc  
mode. Select longer values for Auto off timers > Standby timer in the setup menu (0 186).  
G button B setup menu  
Conformity Marking  
View the standards with which the camera complies.  
G button B setup menu  
Firmware Version  
View the current camera firmware version.  
             
N The Retouch Menu:  
Creating Retouched Copies  
To display the retouch menu, press G and select the N (retouch menu) tab.  
G button  
The retouch menu is used to create trimmed or retouched copies of the photographs  
on the memory card, and is only available when a memory card containing  
photographs is inserted in the camera.  
Option  
D-Lighting  
Red-eye correction  
Trim  
Monochrome  
Filter effects  
0
Option  
0
Option  
Color sketch  
Perspective control  
Miniature effect  
Selective color  
Edit movie  
0
i
j
k
0
1
2
e
NEF (RAW) processing 213  
Resize  
Quick retouch  
Straighten  
Distortion control  
Fisheye  
g
r
u
3
l
m
(
)
f
n Color balance  
Image overlay  
Side-by-side  
comparison *  
p
o
q
Color outline  
* Available only if retouch menu is displayed by pressing P and selecting Retouch in full-  
frame playback when a retouched image or original is displayed.  
A Retouching Copies  
Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch options, although with  
the exceptions of Image overlay and Edit movie > Choose start/end point, each option  
can be applied only once (note that multiple edits may result in loss of detail). Options that  
can not be applied to the current image are grayed out and unavailable.  
A Image Quality and Size  
Except in the case of copies created with Trim and Resize, copies created from JPEG images  
are the same size and quality as the original, while copies created from NEF (RAW) photos are  
saved as large fine-quality JPEG images.  
       
Creating Retouched Copies  
To create a retouched copy:  
1 Display retouch options.  
Highlight the desired item in the retouch menu  
and press 2.  
2 Select a picture.  
Highlight a picture and press J (to view the  
highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the  
X button).  
A Retouch  
The camera may not be able to display or retouch  
images created with other devices. If the image was  
recorded at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) +  
JPEG (0 59), retouch options apply only to the RAW  
copy.  
3 Select retouch options.  
For more information, see the section for the  
selected item. To exit without creating a  
retouched copy, press G.  
4 Create a retouched copy.  
Press J to create a retouched copy. Except in the  
photo information “image only” page (0 136),  
retouched copies are indicated by a N icon.  
A Creating Retouched Copies During Playback  
To create a retouched copy of the picture currently displayed in full-frame playback (0 135),  
press P, then highlight Retouch and press J and select a retouch option (Image overlay  
excluded).  
     
G button N retouch menu  
D-Lighting  
D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs.  
Before  
D-Lighting  
D-Lighting  
(portrait subject)  
Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of correction performed; the effect can be  
previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the photograph.  
Portrait Subjects  
Select Portrait subjects to restrict D-Lighting to the area around the faces of portrait  
subjects.  
A Portrait Subjects  
The camera automatically selects up to three subjects for portrait D-Lighting (note that  
portrait D-Lighting can not be applied to photos taken with Off selected for Auto image  
rotation in the setup menu; 0 202). Depending on composition and how the subjects are  
posed, the desired results may not be achieved; if you are not satisfied, remove the check  
from Portrait subjects.  
G button N retouch menu  
Red-Eye Correction  
This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash, and is available only with  
photographs taken using the flash. The photograph selected for red-eye correction  
can be previewed in the edit display. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and  
press J to create a copy. Note that red-eye correction may not always produce the  
expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the  
image that are not affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before  
proceeding.  
       
G button N retouch menu  
Trim  
Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The  
selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown  
in yellow; create a cropped copy as described in the following  
table.  
To  
Use  
X
Description  
Increase size of crop  
Reduce size of crop  
Press the X button to increase the size of the crop.  
Press the W (Q) button to reduce the size of the crop.  
W (Q)  
Change crop aspect  
ratio  
Rotate the command dial to switch between aspect ratios of  
3 : 2, 4 : 3, 5 : 4, 1 : 1, and 16 : 9.  
Use multi selector to move the crop to another area of the  
image.  
Move crop  
Create copy  
Save the current crop as a separate file.  
A Image Size  
The size of the copy (which varies with crop size and aspect ratio) appears at upper left in the  
crop display.  
A Viewing Cropped Copies  
Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are displayed.  
G button N retouch menu  
Monochrome  
Copy photographs in Black-and-white, Sepia, or  
Cyanotype (blue and white monochrome).  
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype displays a preview  
of the selected image; press 1 to increase color  
saturation, 3 to decrease. Press J to create a  
monochrome copy.  
Increase  
saturation  
Decrease  
saturation  
           
G button N retouch menu  
Filter Effects  
After adjusting filter effects as described below, press J to copy the photograph.  
Option  
Description  
Creates the effect of a skylight filter, making the  
picture less blue.  
Skylight  
Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects, giving  
the copy a “warm” red cast.  
Warm filter  
Red intensifier  
Intensify reds (Red intensifier), greens (Green  
intensifier), or blues (Blue intensifier). Press 1 to  
increase the effect, 3 to decrease.  
Green intensifier  
Blue intensifier  
Add starburst effects to light sources.  
Number of points: Choose from four, six, or eight.  
Filter amount: Choose the brightness of the light  
sources affected.  
Cross screen  
Filter angle: Choose the angle of the points.  
Length of points: Choose the length of points.  
Confirm: Preview the effects of the filter. Press X  
to preview the copy full frame.  
Save: Create a retouched copy.  
Add a soft filter effect. Press 4 or 2 to choose the  
filter strength.  
Soft  
                 
G button N retouch menu  
Color Balance  
Use the multi selector to create a copy with modified color  
balance as shown below. Red, green, and blue histograms  
(0 137) show the distribution of tones in the copy.  
Increase amount of green  
Create retouched copy  
Increase amount of  
Increase amount of amber  
blue  
Increase amount of magenta  
A Zoom  
To zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor, press the X  
button. The histogram will be updated to show data only for the  
portion of the image displayed in the monitor. While the image is  
zoomed in, press the A (L) button to toggle back and forth  
between color balance and zoom. When zoom is selected, you can  
zoom in and out with the X and W (Q) buttons and scroll the image  
with the multi selector.  
   
G button N retouch menu  
Image Overlay  
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to create a single  
picture that is saved separately from the originals; the results, which make use of RAW  
data from the camera image sensor, are noticeably better than overlays created in an  
imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image quality and size  
settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality and size (0 59, 61; all options  
are available). To create an NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).  
+
1 Select Image overlay.  
Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu  
and press 2.  
The dialog shown at right will be displayed, with  
Image 1 highlighted; press J to display a list of  
the NEF (RAW) pictures created with this camera.  
2 Select the first image.  
Use the multi selector to highlight the first  
photograph in the overlay. To view the  
highlighted photograph full frame, press and  
hold the X button. Press J to select the  
highlighted photograph and return to the  
preview display.  
   
3 Select the second image.  
The selected image will appear as Image 1. Highlight Image 2 and press J,  
then select the second photo as described in Step 2.  
4 Adjust gain.  
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and optimize  
exposure for the overlay by pressing 1 or 3 to  
select gain from values between 0.1 and 2.0.  
Repeat for the second image. The default value is  
1.0; select 0.5 to halve gain or 2.0 to double it. The  
effects of gain are visible in the Preview column.  
5 Preview the overlay.  
Press 4 or 2 to place the cursor in the Preview  
column and press 1 or 3 to highlight Overlay.  
Press J to preview the overlay as shown at right  
(to save the overlay without displaying a preview,  
select Save). To return to Step 4 and select new  
photos or adjust gain, press W (Q).  
6 Save the overlay.  
Press J while the preview is displayed to save the  
overlay. After an overlay is created, the resulting  
image will be displayed full-frame in the monitor.  
D Image Overlay  
Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same bit depth can be combined (0 178). The  
overlay has the same photo info as the photograph selected for Image 1.  
G button N retouch menu  
NEF (RAW) Processing  
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.  
1 Select NEF (RAW) processing.  
Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in the retouch  
menu and press 2 to display a picture selection  
dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images created with  
this camera.  
2 Select a photograph.  
Use the multi selector to highlight a photograph  
(to view the highlighted photograph full frame,  
press and hold the X button). Press J to select  
the highlighted photograph and proceed to the  
next step.  
3 Adjust NEF (RAW) processing settings.  
Adjust the settings listed below. Note that white balance is not available with  
pictures created with multiple exposure or image overlay, and that the effects  
of exposure compensation may differ from those that might have been  
expected when the photograph was taken.  
Image quality (0 59)  
Image size (0 61)  
White balance (0 101)  
Exposure compensation (0 92)  
Picture Control (0 111)  
High ISO NR (0 180)  
Color space (0 179)  
D-Lighting (0 207)  
4 Copy the photograph.  
Highlight EXE and press J to create a JPEG copy  
of the selected photograph. To exit without  
copying the photograph, press the G button.  
   
G button N retouch menu  
Resize  
Create small copies of one or more selected photographs.  
1 Select Resize.  
Highlight Resize in the retouch menu and press  
2.  
2 Choose a size.  
Highlight Choose size and press 2.  
Highlight an option and press J.  
3 Choose pictures.  
Highlight Select image and press 2.  
Highlight pictures using the multi selector  
and press the W (Q) button to select or  
deselect (to view the highlighted picture full  
screen, press and hold the X button).  
Selected pictures are marked by a 1 icon.  
Press J when the selection is complete.  
W (Q) button  
4 Save the resized copies.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
Highlight Yes and press J to save the resized  
copies.  
A Viewing Resized Copies  
Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed.  
   
G button N retouch menu  
Quick Retouch  
Create copies with enhanced saturation and contrast.  
D-Lighting is applied as required to brighten dark or backlit  
subjects.  
Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of enhancement. Press J to  
copy the photograph.  
G button N retouch menu  
Straighten  
Create a straightened copy of the selected image. Press 2 to  
rotate the image clockwise by up to five degrees in increments  
of approximately 0.25 degrees, 4 to rotate it counterclockwise  
(note that edges of the image will be trimmed to create a  
rectangular copy). Press J to save the retouched copy.  
G button N retouch menu  
Distortion Control  
Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion. Select Auto  
to let the camera correct distortion automatically and then  
make fine adjustments using the multi selector, or select  
Manual to reduce distortion manually (note that Auto is not  
available with photos taken using auto distortion control; see  
page 179).  
Press 2 to reduce barrel distortion, 4 to reduce pin-cushion distortion (note that  
greater amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges being cropped out).  
Press J to save the retouched copy.  
D Auto  
Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G, E, and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and certain  
other lenses excluded); results are not guaranteed with other lenses.  
           
G button N retouch menu  
Fisheye  
Create copies that appear to have been taken with a fisheye  
lens. Press 2 to increase the effect (this also increases the  
amount that will be cropped out at the edges of the image), 4  
to reduce it. Press J to save the retouched copy.  
G button N retouch menu  
Color Outline  
Create an outline copy of a photograph to use as a base for  
painting. Press J to save the retouched copy.  
Before  
After  
G button N retouch menu  
Color Sketch  
Create a copy of a photograph that resembles a sketch made  
with colored pencils. Press 1 or 3 to highlight Vividness or  
Outlines and press 4 or 2 to change. Vividness can be  
increased to make colors more saturated, or decreased for a  
washed-out, monochromatic effect, while outlines can be made  
thicker or thinner. Thicker outlines make colors more saturated.  
Press J to save the retouched copy.  
           
G button N retouch menu  
Perspective Control  
Create copies that reduce the effects of perspective taken from  
the base of a tall object. Use the multi selector to adjust  
perspective (note that greater amounts of perspective control  
result in more of the edges being cropped out). Press J to save  
the retouched copy.  
Before  
After  
   
G button N retouch menu  
Miniature Effect  
Create a copy that appears to be a photo of a diorama. Works best with photos taken  
from a high vantage point. The area that will be in focus in the copy is indicated by a  
yellow frame.  
To  
Press  
Description  
Choose  
orientation  
W (Q) Press W (Q) to choose orientation of area that is in focus.  
If area of effect is in wide orientation, press 1 or  
3 to position frame showing area of copy that  
will be in focus.  
Choose area  
in focus  
Area in focus  
If area of effect is in tall orientation, press 4 or 2  
to position frame showing area of copy that will  
be in focus.  
If area of effect is in wide orientation, press 4 or 2 to choose height.  
If area of effect is in tall orientation, press 1 or 3 to choose width.  
Create copy.  
Choose size  
Create copy  
   
G button N retouch menu  
Selective Color  
Create a copy in which only selected hues appear in color.  
1 Select Selective color.  
Highlight Selective color in the retouch menu  
and press 2.  
2 Select a photograph.  
Highlight a photograph and press J (to view the  
highlighted photograph full frame, press and  
hold the X button).  
Selected color  
3 Select a color.  
Use the multi selector to position the cursor  
over an object and press A (L) to select  
the color of the object as one that will  
remain in the final copy (the camera may  
have difficulty detecting unsaturated colors;  
A (L) button  
choose a saturated color). To zoom in on the  
picture for precise color selection, press X.  
Press W (Q) to zoom out.  
Color range  
4 Highlight the color range.  
Rotate the command dial to highlight the color  
range for the selected color.  
   
5 Choose the color range.  
Press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease the range of  
similar hues that will be included in the final  
photograph or movie. Choose from values  
between 1 and 7; note that higher values may  
include hues from other colors.  
6 Select additional colors.  
To select additional colors, rotate the command  
dial to highlight another of the three color boxes  
at the top of the display and repeat Steps 3–5 to  
select another color. Repeat for a third color if  
desired. To deselect the highlighted color, press  
O (To remove all colors, press and hold O. A  
confirmation dialog will be displayed; select Yes).  
7 Save the edited copy.  
Press J to copy the photograph.  
Side-by-side Comparison  
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. This option is only available  
if the retouch menu is displayed by pressing the P button and selecting Retouch  
when a copy or original is played back full frame.  
1 Select a picture.  
Select a retouched copy (shown by a N icon)  
or a photograph that has been retouched in  
full-frame playback. Press P, then highlight  
Retouch and press J.  
P button  
2 Select Side-by-side comparison.  
Highlight Side-by-side comparison in the  
retouch menu and press J.  
Options used to create  
3 Compare the copy with the original.  
copy  
The source image is displayed on the left, the  
retouched copy on the right, with the  
options used to create the copy listed at the  
top of the display. Press 4 or 2 to switch  
between the source image and the  
retouched copy. To view the highlighted  
picture full frame, press and hold the X  
button. If the copy was created from two  
Source Retouched  
image  
copy  
images using Image overlay, press 1 or 3  
to view the other source image. If multiple copies exist for the current source  
image, press 1 or 3 to view the other copies. Press J to return to playback  
with the highlighted image displayed.  
D Side-by-side comparison  
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that has  
since been deleted or that was protected when the copy was made (0 143).  
   
m Recent Settings/O My Menu  
Both recent settings, a menu listing the 20 most recently used settings, and My Menu,  
a custom menu listing up to 20 user-selected options, can be accessed by pressing  
the G button highlighting the last tab in the menu list (either m or O).  
G button  
Choosing a Menu  
Use the Choose tab option to choose the menu displayed.  
1 Select Choose tab.  
Highlight Choose tab and press 2.  
2 Select a menu.  
Highlight O MY MENU or m RECENT  
SETTINGS and press J to display the  
selected menu.  
m Recent Settings  
When m RECENT SETTINGS is selected for Choose tab, the  
menu lists the 20 most recently used settings, with the most  
recently-used items first. Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option  
and press 2 to select.  
A Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu  
To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and  
press the O button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O  
again to delete the selected item.  
       
O My Menu  
Selecting O MY MENU for Choose tab lets you access a customized menu of up to  
20 options selected from the playback, shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and  
retouch menus. Follow the steps below to add items to, delete items from, and  
reorder items in My Menu.  
Adding Options to My Menu  
1 Select Add items.  
Highlight Add items and press 2.  
2 Select a menu.  
Highlight the name of the menu containing  
the option you wish to add and press 2.  
3 Select an item.  
Highlight the desired menu item and press  
J.  
4 Position the new item.  
Press 1 or 3 to move the new item up or  
down in My Menu. Press J to add the new  
item. Repeat steps 1–4 to select additional  
items.  
A Adding Options to My Menu  
The items currently displayed in My Menu are indicated by a check  
mark. Items indicated by a V icon can not be selected.  
     
Deleting Options from My Menu  
1 Select Remove items.  
Highlight Remove items and press 2.  
2 Select items.  
Highlight items and press 2 to select or  
deselect. Selected items are indicated by a  
check mark.  
3 Delete the selected items.  
Press J. A confirmation dialog will be  
displayed; press J again to delete the  
selected items.  
 
Reordering Options in My Menu  
1 Select Rank items.  
Highlight Rank items and press 2.  
2 Select an item.  
Highlight the item you wish to move and  
press J.  
3 Position the item.  
Press 1 or 3 to move the item up or down in  
My Menu and press J. Repeat Steps 2–3 to  
reposition additional items.  
4 Exit to My Menu.  
Press the G button to return to My Menu.  
G button  
 
Technical Notes  
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories, cleaning and storing  
the camera, and what to do if an error message is displayed or you encounter  
problems using the camera.  
Compatible Lenses  
Compatible CPU Lenses  
This camera supports autofocus with AF-S and AF-I CPU lenses only. AF-S lenses have  
names beginning with AF-S, AF-I lenses names beginning with AF-I. Autofocus is not  
supported with other autofocus (AF) lenses. The following table lists the features  
available with compatible lenses in viewfinder photography:  
Camera setting  
Focus  
Mode  
Metering  
L
MF (with electronic  
rangefinder)  
z
M
N
Lens/accessory  
AF-S, AF-I NIKKOR  
Other type G or D AF NIKKOR  
PC-E NIKKOR series2, 3  
PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D5  
AF-S/AF-I teleconverter6  
AF  
z
MF  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
M
Other modes 3D Color  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z1  
z1  
z1  
z1  
z1  
z1  
z1  
z7  
z
z4  
z4  
z7  
z8  
z9  
Other AF NIKKOR (except lenses for F3AF)  
AI-P NIKKOR  
1 Spot metering meters selected focus point (0 90).  
2 Observe due caution when tilting or shifting PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED lenses, as they may contact  
the camera body and cause damage or injury.  
3 Shifting and/or tilting the lens interferes with exposure.  
4 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.  
5 Optimal exposure will only be achieved if the lens is at maximum aperture and the lens is not shifted  
or tilted.  
6 AF-S or AF-I lens required.  
7 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
8 When AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 (New), or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5  
lenses are zoomed all the way in at the minimum focus distance, the in-focus indicator may be  
displayed when the image on the matte screen in the viewfinder is not in focus. Focus manually until  
image in viewfinder is in focus.  
9 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
Noise in the form of lines may appear during autofocus when movies are recorded at high ISO  
sensitivities. Use manual focus or focus lock.  
D IX NIKKOR Lenses  
IX NIKKOR lenses can not be used.  
             
A Identifying CPU and Type G, E, and D Lenses  
CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts, type G, E, and D lenses by a  
letter on the lens barrel. Type G and E lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring.  
CPU contacts  
Aperture ring  
CPU lens  
Type G or E lens  
Type D lens  
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring, lock the aperture ring at the  
minimum aperture (highest f-number).  
A Matrix Metering  
For matrix metering, the camera uses a 2016-pixel RGB sensor to set exposure according to  
tone distribution, color, composition, and, with type G, E, or D lenses, distance information  
(3D color matrix metering II; with other CPU lenses, the camera uses color matrix metering  
II; which does not include 3D distance information).  
         
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses  
Non-CPU lenses may only be used when the camera is in mode M. Selecting another  
mode disables the shutter release. Aperture must be adjusted manually via the lens  
aperture ring and the camera metering system, i-TTL flash control, and other features  
requiring a CPU lens can not be used. Some non-CPU lenses can not be used; see  
“Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses,” below.  
Camera setting  
Focus  
Mode  
MF (with electronic  
Lens/accessory  
AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR or Nikon Series E lenses  
Medical NIKKOR 120mm f/4  
Reflex NIKKOR  
PC NIKKOR  
AF  
rangefinder)  
MF  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
M
Other modes  
z1  
z2  
z2, 3  
z2  
z2  
z2  
z2  
z2  
z
z4  
z5  
z1  
z1  
AI-type Teleconverter  
PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attachment 6  
Auto extension rings (PK-series 11A, 12, or 13; PN-11)  
1 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
2 Exposure indicator can not be used.  
3 Can be used at shutter speeds slower than flash sync speed by one step or more.  
4 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.  
5 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
6 Attach in vertical orientation (can be used in horizontal orientation once attached).  
D Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses  
The following accessories and non-CPU lenses can NOT be used with the D5300:  
TC-16AS AF teleconverter  
Non-AI lenses  
Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8,  
1200mm f/11)  
Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)  
2.1cm f/4  
Extension Ring K2  
180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers 174041–174180)  
360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers 174031–174127)  
200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers 280001–300490)  
AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED, AF Teleconverter TC-16)  
PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or earlier)  
PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–906200)  
PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)  
Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)  
Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers 142361–143000)  
Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers 200111–200310)  
     
D AF-Assist Illumination  
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 0.5–3.0 m (1 ft 8 in.–9 ft 10 in.); when using the  
illuminator, use a lens with a focal length of 18–200 mm and remove the lens hood. AF-assist  
illumination is not available with the following lenses:  
AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 80–400mm f/4.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S VR Nikkor 200mm f/2G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 200mm f/2G ED VR II  
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm f/4G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II  
AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–300mm f/4.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 70–200mm f/2.8G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED VR II  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 80–200mm f/2.8D IF-ED  
At ranges under 1 m (3 ft 3 in.), the following lenses may block the AF-assist illuminator and  
interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm f/3.5–4.5G ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D IF-ED  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm f/2.8G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5G ED  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED  
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G  
IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR  
AF-S NIKKOR 28mm f/1.8G  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm f/2.8D IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 35mm f/1.4G  
AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/4G ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/4G ED VR  
AF-S NIKKOR 85mm f/1.4G  
AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED  
 
D The Built-in Flash  
The built-in flash can be used with lenses with focal lengths of 18–300 mm, although in  
some cases the flash may be unable to entirely light the subject at some ranges or focal  
lengths due to shadows cast by the lens (see the illustration below), while lenses that block  
the subject’s view of the red-eye reduction lamp may interfere with red-eye reduction.  
Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows.  
Shadow  
Shadow  
The flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m and can not be used in the macro range of macro  
zoom lenses. The flash may be unable to light the entire subject with the following lenses at  
ranges less than those given below:  
Lens  
Zoom position Minimum distance without vignetting  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm f/3.5–4.5G ED  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 12–24mm f/4G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR  
24 mm  
24 mm  
35 mm  
24–85 mm  
28 mm  
35 mm  
28 mm  
35 mm  
45–55 mm  
24 mm  
28 mm  
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 16–85mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D IF-ED  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm f/2.8G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5G ED  
35 mm  
24 mm  
28–35 mm  
18 mm  
24–70 mm  
18 mm  
24 mm  
18 mm  
24–135 mm  
24 mm  
35–140 mm  
24 mm  
35–200 mm  
35–300 mm  
24 mm  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
2.5 m/ 8 ft 2 in.  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
2.0 m/ 6 ft 7 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
2.5 m/ 8 ft 2 in.  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
AF Zoom-Nikkor 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5D IF-ED  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 18–70mm f/3.5–4.5G IF-ED  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 18–135mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED,  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF Zoom-Nikkor 20–35mm f/2.8D IF  
AF-S NIKKOR 24mm f/1.4G ED  
28 mm  
35 mm  
24 mm  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
 
Lens  
Zoom position Minimum distance without vignetting  
35 mm  
50–70 mm  
24 mm  
28–120 mm  
24 mm  
35 mm  
50–70 mm  
28 mm  
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED  
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR  
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.  
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.  
No vignetting  
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
2.5 m/ 8 ft 2 in.  
2.0 m/ 6 ft 7 in.  
5.0 m/16 ft 5 in.  
3.0 m/ 9 ft 10 in.  
No vignetting  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm f/2.8D IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm f/4G IF-ED  
35 mm  
250 mm  
350 mm  
200 mm  
250 mm  
300–400 mm  
24 mm  
AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II  
PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED *  
* When not shifted or tilted.  
3.0 m/ 9 ft 10 in.  
When used with the AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED, the flash will be unable to light the  
entire subject at all ranges.  
A Calculating Angle of View  
The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 × 24 mm. The size of the area exposed  
by the D5300, in contrast, is 23.5 × 15.6 mm, meaning that the angle of view of a 35mm  
camera is approximately 1.5 times that of the D5300. The approximate focal length of lenses  
for the D5300 in 35mm format can be calculated by multiplying the focal length of the lens  
by about 1.5.  
Picture size (35mm format)  
(36 × 24 mm)  
Picture diagonal  
Lens  
Picture size (D5300)  
(23.5 × 15.6 mm)  
Angle of view (35mm format)  
Angle of view (D5300)  
   
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)  
The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) and can be used with  
CLS-compatible flash units. The built-in flash will not fire when an optional flash unit  
is attached.  
Flash Units Compatible with the Creative Lighting  
System (CLS)  
The camera can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash units:  
Flash unit  
Feature  
SB-910 1 SB-900 1  
34/111 34/111 38/125  
48/157 48/157 53/174 39/128 42/138  
SB-800  
SB-700 1  
28/92  
SB-600  
30/98  
SB-400 2 SB-300 2 SB-R200 3  
ISO 100  
ISO 200  
21/69  
30/98  
18/59  
25/82  
10/33  
14/46  
Guide No. 4  
1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-910, SB-900, or SB-700 when AUTO or N (flash) is selected for white  
balance, the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance appropriately.  
2 Wireless flash control is not available.  
3 Controlled remotely using optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, or SB-700 flash unit or SU-800 wireless  
Speedlight commander.  
4 m/ft, 20 °C (68 °F), SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head position; SB-910,  
SB-900, and SB-700 with standard illumination.  
The SU-800 wireless speedlight commander: When mounted on a CLS-compatible  
camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander for remote SB-910, SB-900,  
SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash units in up to three groups. The SU-800  
itself is not equipped with a flash.  
A The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)  
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved communication between  
the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography. Refer to the  
documentation provided with the flash unit for details.  
A Guide Number  
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide Number by the aperture.  
For example, at ISO 100 the SB-800 has a Guide Number of 38 m or 125 ft (35 mm zoom head  
position); its range at an aperture of f/5.6 is 38÷5.6 or about 6.8 meters (or in feet,  
125÷5.6=approximately 23 ft 7 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity, multiply the  
Guide Number by the square root of two (approximately 1.4).  
       
The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash units:  
CLS-compatible flash units  
SU-800  
SB-910  
Close-up  
SB-900 SB-800 SB-700 SB-600 Commander photography SB-R200 SB-400 SB-300  
i-TTL balanced fill-flash  
for digital SLR 1  
Standard i-TTL flash for  
digital SLR  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
i-TTL  
z 2  
z 2  
z 2  
AA Auto aperture  
z 3  
z 3  
z 3  
z 3  
A
GN  
M
Non-TTL auto  
Distance-priority  
manual  
z
z
z
Manual  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z4  
z4  
RPT Repeating flash  
Remote flash control  
i-TTL i-TTL  
Quick wireless flash  
control  
[A:B]  
z
z
AA Auto aperture  
z 5  
z
z
z
z
z 5  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
A
M
Non-TTL auto  
Manual  
RPT Repeating flash  
i-TTL i-TTL  
Quick wireless flash  
control  
AA Auto aperture  
[A:B]  
z
z
z
z
z
z 5  
z
z 5  
z
z
z
z
z
z
A
M
Non-TTL auto  
Manual  
RPT Repeating flash  
Flash Color Information  
Communication  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
AF-assist for multi-area AF  
Red-eye reduction  
Camera flash mode selection  
Camera flash unit firmware  
update  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
1 Not available with spot metering.  
2 Can also be selected with flash unit.  
3
AA/A mode selection performed on flash unit using custom settings. A is selected when a non-CPU lens  
is used.  
4 Can only be selected with camera (0 192).  
5 When a non-CPU lens is used, non-TTL auto (A) is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit.  
 
Other Flash Units  
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual modes. Use with  
the camera in exposure mode S or M and a shutter speed of 1/200 s or slower selected.  
SB-30, SB-27 2, SB-22S, SB-23, SB-29 3,  
SB-22, SB-20, SB-16B, SB-15 SB-21B 3, SB-29S 3  
Flash unit  
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, SB-28,  
SB-26, SB-25, SB-24  
Flash mode  
SB-50DX 1  
A
M
Non-TTL auto  
Manual  
Repeating flash  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
G
REAR Rear-curtain sync 4  
1 Select mode P, S, A, or M, lower built-in flash, and use optional flash unit only.  
2 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash unit to A (non-TTL auto  
flash).  
3 Autofocus is available with AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED and AF-S Micro NIKKOR 60mm  
f/2.8G ED lenses only.  
4 Available when camera is used to select flash mode.  
A The AS-15 Sync Terminal Adapter  
When the AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately) is mounted on the camera  
accessory shoe, flash accessories can be connected via a sync cable.  
D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories  
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory  
shoe could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera  
or flash. Before using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-authorized  
service representative for more information.  
D Notes on Optional Flash Units  
Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions. If the flash unit supports CLS, refer  
to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR cameras. The D5300 is not included in the  
“digital SLR” category in the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.  
If an optional flash unit is attached in shooting modes other than j, %, 3, and ) the flash  
will fire with every shot, even in modes in which the built-in flash can not be used.  
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 12800. At values over  
12800, the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings. If the  
flash-ready indicator flashes for about three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash  
has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed (CLS-compatible flash  
units only; for information on the exposure and flash charge indicators on other units, see  
the manual provided with the flash).  
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography, correct  
exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We recommend that you choose spot  
metering to select standard i-TTL flash control. Take a test shot and view the results in the  
monitor.  
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit. Do not use other  
panels such as diffusion panels, as this may produce incorrect exposure.  
If the controls on the optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700 or SB-600 flash unit or SU-800  
wireless Speedlight commander are used to set flash compensation, Y will appear in the  
information display.  
The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SB-400 provide red-eye reduction, while the  
SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination with the  
following restrictions:  
SB-910 and SB-900: AF-assist  
illumination is available with 17–  
135 mm AF lenses, however,  
autofocus is available only with the  
focus points shown at right.  
SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800: AF-assist  
illumination is available with 24–  
105 mm AF lenses, however,  
autofocus is available only with the  
focus points shown at right.  
SB-700: AF-assist illumination is  
available with 24–135 mm AF  
lenses, however, autofocus is  
available only with the focus points  
shown at right.  
17–19 mm  
24–34 mm  
20–105 mm  
35–49 mm  
24–135 mm  
106–135 mm  
50–105 mm  
     
Other Accessories  
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for the D5300.  
Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14a (0 11): Additional EN-EL14a batteries are  
available from local retailers and Nikon-authorized service representatives.  
EN-EL14 batteries can also be used.  
Power  
sources  
Battery Charger MH-24 (0 11): Recharge EN-EL14a and EN-EL14 batteries.  
Power Connector EP-5A, AC Adapter EH-5b: These accessories can be used to power  
the camera for extended periods (EH-5a and EH-5 AC adapters can also be  
used). A power connector EP-5A is required to connect the camera to the  
EH-5b, EH-5a, or EH-5; see page 239 for details.  
Filters intended for special-effects photography may interfere with autofocus  
or the electronic rangefinder.  
The D5300 can not be used with linear polarizing filters. Use C-PL or C-PL II  
circular polarizing filters instead.  
NC filters are recommended for protecting the lens.  
Filters  
To prevent ghosting, use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is  
framed against a bright light, or when a bright light source is in the frame.  
Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors  
(filter factors) over 1 × (Y44, Y48, Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S,  
ND8, ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter manual for details.  
DK-20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses: Lenses are available with diopters of –5, –4, –3,  
–2, 0, +0.5, +1, +2, and +3 m–1 when the camera diopter adjustment control is  
in the neutral position (–1 m–1). Use eyepiece correction lenses only if the  
desired focus can not be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control  
(–1.7 to +1.0 m–1). Test eyepiece correction lenses before purchase to ensure  
that the desired focus can be achieved. The rubber eyecup can not be used  
with eyepiece correction lenses.  
Viewfinder  
eyepiece  
accessories  
Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in the center of the  
viewfinder for greater precision during focusing. Eyepiece adapter required  
(available separately).  
Eyepiece Adapter DK-22: The DK-22 is used when attaching the DG-2 magnifier.  
The monitor can not be rotated with the adapter in place.  
Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-6: The DR-6 attaches at a right angle to the  
viewfinder eyepiece, allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed at  
right angles to the lens (for example, from directly above when the camera is  
horizontal). The monitor can not be rotated with the attachment in place.  
Capture NX 2: A complete photo editing package offering such features as white  
balance adjustment and color control points.  
Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a computer to record  
movies and photographs and save photographs directly to the computer hard  
disk.  
Software  
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software. Most Nikon software offers an  
auto update feature (Nikon Message Center 2) when the computer is connected  
to the Internet. See the websites listed on page xiv for the latest information on  
supported operating systems.  
                           
Body Cap BF-1B/Body Cap BF-1A: The body cap keeps the mirror, viewfinder screen,  
and image sensor free of dust when a lens is not in place.  
Body cap  
Wireless Remote Control ML-L3 (0 70): The ML-L3 uses a 3 V CR2025 battery.  
Pressing the battery-chamber latch to the right (q), insert a fingernail into the  
gap and open the battery chamber (w). Ensure that the battery is inserted in  
the correct orientation (r).  
Wireless Remote Controller WR-R10 */WR-T10: When a WR-R10 wireless remote  
controller is attached, the camera can be controlled wirelessly using a WR-T10  
wireless remote controller (0 71, 203). The WR-T10 uses a 3 V CR2032 battery.  
Remote  
controls/  
wireless  
remote  
controller  
Insert a fingernail into the gap behind the battery-chamber latch and open the  
battery chamber (q). Ensure that the battery is inserted in the correct  
orientation (e).  
Wireless Remote Controller WR-1 (0 71, 203): WR-1 units are used in groups of two  
or more, with one functioning as a transmitter and the remaining units acting  
as receivers. The receivers are attached to the accessory terminals of one or  
more cameras, allowing the transmitter to be used to release the camera  
shutters.  
Microphones Stereo Microphone ME-1 (0 129)*  
The D5300 is equipped with an accessory terminal for  
WR-1 and WR-R10 wireless remote controllers (0 71), MC-DC2  
remote cords (0 88), and GP-1/GP-1A GPS units (0 81),  
which connect with the 4 mark on the connector  
aligned with the 2 next to the accessory terminal  
(close the connector cover when the terminal is not in  
use).  
Accessory  
terminal  
accessories  
USB and A/V  
connector  
accessories  
UC-E17 and UC-E6 USB cables (0 153, 156): The supplied UC-E17 cable is not  
available for separate purchase; purchase UC-E6 cables instead.  
EG-CP16 audio/video cables  
* A wireless remote controller can not be attached at the same time as an ME-1 stereo  
microphone. Attempting to forcibly attach accessories can damage the camera or  
accessory.  
A Optional Accessories  
Availability may vary with country or region. See our website or brochures for the latest  
information.  
           
Approved Memory Cards  
The following SD memory cards have been tested and approved for use in the D5300.  
Cards with class 6 or faster write speeds are recommended for movie recording.  
Recording may end unexpectedly when cards with slower write speeds are used.  
SD memory cards  
SDHC memory cards 2  
SDXC memory cards 3  
SanDisk  
Toshiba  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB  
64 GB  
Panasonic  
4 GB, 6 GB, 8 GB, 12 GB, 16 GB, 24 GB, 32 GB 48 GB, 64 GB  
2 GB 1  
Lexar Media  
Platinum II  
Professional  
Full-HD Video  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB  
64 GB  
64 GB, 128 GB  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB  
1 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used support 2 GB cards.  
2 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are SDHC-compliant. The  
camera supports UHS-I.  
3 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are  
SDXC-compliant. The camera supports UHS-I.  
Other cards have not been tested. For more details on the above cards, please  
contact the manufacturer.  
   
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter  
Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power connector and AC adapter.  
1 Ready the camera.  
Open the battery-chamber (q) and power connector (w)  
covers.  
2 Insert the EP-5A power connector.  
Be sure to insert the connector in the orientation shown,  
using the connector to keep the orange battery latch  
pressed to one side. Be sure the connector is fully inserted.  
3 Close the battery-chamber cover.  
Position the power connector cable so that it passes  
through the power connector slot and close the battery-  
chamber cover.  
4 Connect the AC adapter.  
Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on AC adapter (e) and  
the EP-5A power cable to the DC socket (r). A P icon is displayed in the  
monitor when the camera is powered by the AC adapter and power connector.  
     
Caring for the Camera  
Storage  
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and  
store it in a cool, dry area with the terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or  
mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do not store your camera  
with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:  
are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%  
are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as  
televisions or radios  
are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below –10 °C (14 °F)  
Cleaning  
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After  
Camera  
body  
using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly  
dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly. Important: Dust or other foreign  
matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty.  
These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust and lint with a blower. If  
using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To  
remove fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft  
cloth and clean with care.  
Lens,  
mirror, and  
viewfinder  
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing fingerprints and other stains,  
wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure,  
as this could result in damage or malfunction.  
Monitor  
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.  
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories  
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the  
camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative once  
every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees  
apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if  
the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as  
lenses or optional flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.  
     
Image Sensor Cleaning  
If you suspect that dirt or dust on the image sensor is appearing in photographs, you  
can clean the sensor using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu. The  
sensor can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option, or cleaning can be  
performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off.  
“Clean Now”  
1 Place the camera base down.  
Image sensor cleaning is most effective when  
the camera is placed base down as shown at  
right.  
2 Select Clean image sensor in the setup  
menu.  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
Highlight Clean image sensor in the setup  
menu (0 195) and press 2.  
G button  
3 Select Clean now.  
Highlight Clean now and press J.  
The camera will check the image sensor and then  
begin cleaning. 1 flashes in the viewfinder  
and other operations can not be performed. Do  
not remove or disconnect the power source until  
cleaning is complete and the message shown at  
right is no longer displayed.  
       
“Clean at Startup/Shutdown”  
1 Select Clean at startup/shutdown.  
Select Clean image sensor, then highlight Clean  
at startup/shutdown and press 2.  
2 Select an option.  
Highlight an option and press J. Choose from  
Clean at startup, Clean at shutdown, Clean at  
startup & shutdown, and Cleaning off.  
D Image Sensor Cleaning  
Using camera controls during startup interrupts image sensor cleaning.  
Cleaning is performed by vibrating the image sensor. If dust can not be fully removed using  
the options in the Clean image sensor menu, clean the image sensor manually (0 243) or  
consult a Nikon-authorized service representative.  
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image sensor cleaning  
may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s internal circuitry. Cleaning can be  
performed again after a short wait.  
Manual Cleaning  
If foreign matter can not be removed from the image sensor using the Clean image  
sensor option in the setup menu (0 241), the sensor can be cleaned manually as  
described below. Note, however, that the sensor is extremely delicate and easily  
damaged. Nikon recommends that the sensor be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized  
service personnel.  
1 Charge the battery.  
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the image  
sensor. Be sure the battery is fully charged before proceeding.  
2 Remove the lens.  
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.  
3 Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.  
Turn the camera on and press the G  
button to display the menus. Highlight Lock  
mirror up for cleaning in the setup menu  
and press 2 (note that this option is not  
G button  
available at battery levels of H or below).  
4 Press J.  
The message shown at right will be displayed in the  
monitor.  
5 Raise the mirror.  
Press the shutter-release button all the way down. The  
mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open,  
revealing the image sensor.  
6 Examine the image sensor.  
Holding the camera so that light falls on the image sensor,  
examine the interior of the camera for dust or lint. If no  
foreign objects are present, proceed to Step 8.  
       
7 Clean the sensor.  
Remove any dust and lint from the sensor with a blower.  
Do not use a blower-brush, as the bristles could damage  
the sensor. Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can  
only be removed by Nikon-authorized service personnel.  
Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the  
sensor.  
8 Turn the camera off.  
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close.  
Replace the lens or body cap.  
A Use a Reliable Power Source  
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers off while the mirror  
is raised, the curtain will close automatically. To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the  
following precautions:  
Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is  
raised.  
If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and the self-timer lamp  
will flash to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after  
about two minutes. End cleaning or inspection immediately.  
D Foreign Matter on the Image Sensor  
Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact  
with the image sensor during production and shipping. The D5300, however, is designed to  
be used with interchangeable lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses  
are removed or exchanged. Once inside the camera, this foreign matter may adhere to the  
image sensor, where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions. To  
protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with  
the camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be  
adhering to the body cap. Avoid exchanging lenses in dusty environments.  
Should foreign matter find its way onto the image sensor, clean the sensor as described  
above, or have the sensor cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel. Photographs  
affected by the presence of foreign matter on the sensor can be retouched using  
Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 236) or the clean image options available in some  
third-party imaging applications.  
 
Caring for the Camera and Battery:  
Cautions  
Caring for the Camera  
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration.  
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if immersed in water or exposed  
to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.  
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such as those that occur  
when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day, can cause condensation inside the  
device. To prevent condensation, place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before  
exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.  
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment  
that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or  
the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the  
monitor, damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal circuitry.  
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light  
source for an extended period. Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or  
produce a white blur effect in photographs.  
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not unplug the product or  
remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted.  
Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to  
product memory or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of power, avoid  
carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is connected.  
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove dust and lint, then  
wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any  
sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly.  
The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower.  
When using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove  
fingerprints and other stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth  
and wipe the lens carefully.  
See “Image Sensor Cleaning” (0 241, 243) for information on cleaning the image sensor.  
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged. Under  
no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or  
subject it to powerful air currents from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear  
the curtain.  
     
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. If you are  
using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to prevent fire. If the product will not be used for an  
extended period, remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic bag  
containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a plastic bag, as this may  
cause the material to deteriorate. Note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb  
moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals.  
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a month. Turn the  
camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away.  
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before putting the battery  
away.  
Notes on the monitor: The monitor is constructed with extremely high precision; at least 99.99% of  
pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01% being missing or defective. Hence while these  
displays may contain pixels that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black),  
this is not a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the device.  
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.  
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or malfunction. Dust or lint  
on the monitor can be removed with a blower. Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a  
soft cloth or chamois leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury  
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering  
the eyes and mouth.  
Moiré: Moiré is an interference pattern created by the interaction of an image containing a  
regular, repeating grid, such as the pattern of weave in cloth or windows in a building, with the  
camera image sensor grid. If you notice moiré in your photographs, try changing the distance  
to the subject, zooming in and out, or changing the angle between the subject and the  
camera.  
Caring for the Battery  
Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Observe the following precautions when  
handling batteries:  
Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.  
Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.  
Keep the battery terminals clean.  
Turn the product off before replacing the battery.  
Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and replace the terminal  
cover. These devices draw minute amounts of charge even when off and could draw the  
battery down to the point that it will no longer function. If the battery will not be used for  
some time, insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it and storing it in a location  
with an ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F; avoid hot or extremely cold  
locations). Repeat this process at least once every six months.  
Turning the camera on and off repeatedly when the battery is fully discharged will shorten  
battery life. Batteries that have been fully discharged must be charged before use.  
 
The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in use. Attempting to  
charge the battery while the internal temperature is elevated will impair battery  
performance, and the battery may not charge or charge only partially. Wait for the battery  
to cool before charging.  
Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance.  
A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when used at room  
temperature indicates that it requires replacement. Purchase a new EN-EL14a battery.  
Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on important occasions, ready a  
spare EN-EL14a battery and keep it fully charged. Depending on your location, it may be  
difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice. Note that on cold days, the  
capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking  
photographs outside in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange  
the two as necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge.  
Used batteries are a valuable resource; recycle in accord with local regulations.  
 
Available Settings  
The following table lists the settings that can be adjusted in each mode.  
k, l, p, m, n,  
o, r, s, t, u, %, g, ', (, 3,  
P, S, A, M v, w, x, y, z, 0 1, 2, 3, )  
i, j  
z
Image quality 2  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Image size 2  
z
z
White balance 2  
z
z
Set Picture Control 2  
Auto distortion control  
Color space  
z
z
Active D-Lighting 2  
HDR (high dynamic range) 2  
z
Long exposure NR  
High ISO NR  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
(not available  
in % mode)  
z
(not available  
in % mode)  
z
ISO sensitivity settings 3  
(not available  
in % mode)  
z 4  
Release mode 2  
Multiple exposure 2  
z 4  
z
z
z 4  
z
Interval timer shooting  
Movie settings  
z
z
z
z
z
z
(not available  
in ) mode)  
z
   
k, l, p, m, n,  
o, r, s, t, u, %, g, ', (, 3,  
P, S , A , M v, w, x, y, z, 0 1, 2, 3, )  
z
i, j  
Focus mode (viewfinder)  
AF-area mode (viewfinder)  
z
z
z
(not available  
in % mode)  
z 4  
(not available  
in % and (  
modes)  
z 4  
z
z4  
Focus mode (live view/movie)  
AF-area mode (live view/movie)  
AE-L/AF-L button hold  
z
z
z
z
z
z4  
z4  
(not available  
in ( mode)  
z 4  
4
z
z
z
(available  
only in P  
mode)  
z
Flexible program  
Metering  
z4  
Exposure compensation  
Bracketing  
z
z
(available only  
in % mode)  
z 4  
z4  
z4  
(not  
available  
in j  
mode)  
(not available  
in l, m, r, t,  
u, v, x, y, z,  
and 0 modes)  
(available only  
in g and '  
modes)  
Flash mode  
z
z
Flash compensation  
1 Reset with Reset shooting menu (0 177).  
2 Reset with two-button reset (0 72). Individual settings for multiple exposure are  
unaffected.  
3 Selecting P, S, A, or M mode after selecting Auto for ISO sensitivity settings > ISO  
sensitivity resets ISO sensitivity to the value last selected in P, S, A, and M modes.  
4 Reset when mode dial is rotated to new setting.  
k, l, p, m, n,  
o, r, s, t, u, %, g, ', (, 3,  
P, S, A, M v, w, x, y, z, 0 1, 2, 3, )  
i, j  
z
a1: AF-C priority selection  
a2: Number of focus points  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
(not available  
in l, m, r, t,  
u, v, and w  
modes)  
z
z
(not available  
in % and (  
modes)  
a3: Built-in AF-assist illuminator  
z
z
a4: Rangefinder  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
b1: EV steps for exposure cntrl  
c1: Shutter-release button AE-L  
c2: Auto off timers  
c3: Self-timer  
c4: Remote on duration (ML-L3)  
d1: Beep  
d2: Viewfinder grid display  
d3: ISO display  
d4: File number sequence  
d5: Exposure delay mode  
d6: Print date  
e1: Flash cntrl for built-in flash  
e2: Auto bracketing set  
f1: Assign Fn button  
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L button  
f3: Reverse dial rotation  
f4: Slot empty release lock  
f5: Reverse indicators  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
* Reset with Reset custom settings (0 183).  
Troubleshooting  
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of common problems below  
before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative.  
Battery/Display  
The camera is on but does not respond: Wait for recording to end. If the problem persists, turn the  
camera off. If the camera does not turn off, remove and reinsert the battery or, if you are using  
an AC adapter, disconnect and reconnect the AC adapter. Note that although any data  
currently being recorded will be lost, data that have already been recorded will not be affected  
by removing or disconnecting the power source.  
Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus (0 15). If this does not correct the problem,  
select single-servo autofocus (AF-S; 0 51), single-point AF (c; 0 53), and the center focus  
point, and then frame a high-contrast subject in the center focus point and press the shutter-  
release button halfway to focus the camera. With the camera in focus, use the diopter  
adjustment control to bring the subject into clear focus in the viewfinder. If necessary,  
viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using optional corrective lenses (0 236).  
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers;  
0 186).  
Information display does not appear in monitor: Shutter-release button is pressed halfway. If  
information display does not appear when you remove your finger from shutter-release  
button, confirm that On is selected for Auto info display (0 199) and that battery is charged.  
Viewfinder display is unresponsive and dim: The response times and brightness of this display vary  
with temperature.  
Shooting (All Modes)  
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.  
Shutter-release disabled:  
Memory card is locked, full, or not inserted (0 12, 15).  
Release locked is selected for Custom Setting f4 (Slot empty release lock; 0 194) and no  
memory card is inserted (0 12).  
Built-in flash is charging (0 23).  
Camera is not in focus (0 20).  
CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at highest f-number (0 227).  
Non-CPU lens is attached but camera is not in mode M (0 228).  
Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous shooting mode: Continuous  
shooting is not available if built-in flash fires (0 47, 62).  
Final photo is larger than area shown in viewfinder: Viewfinder horizontal and vertical frame coverage  
is approximately 95%.  
       
Photos are out of focus:  
AF-S or AF-I lens is not attached: use AF-S or AF-I lens or focus manually.  
Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus lock (0 52, 55, 57).  
Camera is in manual focus mode: focus manually (0 57).  
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Use A (L) button to lock focus  
when live view is off and AF-C is selected for focus mode or when photographing moving  
subjects in AF-A mode (0 55).  
Can not select focus point:  
e (Auto-area AF; 0 53) is selected: choose another AF-area mode.  
Press shutter-release button halfway to start standby timer (0 23).  
Can not select AF-area mode: Manual focus selected (0 51, 57).  
AF-assist illuminator does not light:  
AF-assist illuminator does not light if AF-C is selected for autofocus mode (0 51) or if  
continuous-servo autofocus is selected when the camera is in AF-A mode. Choose AF-S. AF-  
assist is also not available when 3D-tracking is selected for AF-area mode; if single-point or  
dynamic-area AF is selected, select center focus point (0 53, 55).  
The camera is currently in live view or a movie is being recorded.  
Off is selected for Custom Setting a3 (Built-in AF-assist illuminator, 0 185).  
The AF-assist illuminator can not be used in some shooting modes (0 248).  
Illuminator has turned off automatically. Illuminator may become hot with continued use;  
wait for it to cool down.  
Image size can not be changed: An NEF (RAW) option is selected for image quality (0 60).  
Camera is slow to record photos:  
Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance, access lamp may light  
for up to about a minute after shooting ends in continuous release modes.  
Turn long exposure noise reduction off (0 180).  
Noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) appear in photos:  
Choose lower ISO sensitivity or turn high ISO noise reduction on (0 180).  
Shutter speed is slower than 1 s: use long exposure noise reduction (0 180).  
Turn Active D-Lighting off to avoid heightening the effects of noise (0 95).  
No photo taken when remote control shutter-release button is pressed:  
Replace battery in remote control (0 237).  
Choose remote control release mode (0 70).  
Flash is charging (0 23).  
Time selected for Custom Setting c4 (Remote on duration (ML-L3), 0 187) has elapsed.  
Bright light is interfering with ML-L3 remote control.  
Beep does not sound:  
Off is selected for Custom Setting d1 (Beep; 0 187).  
Camera is in quiet shutter-release mode (0 48), or movie is being recorded (0 126).  
MF or AF-C is selected as the focus mode or subject moves when AF-A is selected (0 51).  
Smudges appear in photographs: Clean front and rear lens elements. If problem persists, perform  
image sensor cleaning (0 241).  
Date is not imprinted on photos: An NEF (RAW) option is selected for image quality (0 60, 190).  
 
Sound is not recorded with movies: Microphone off is selected for Movie settings > Microphone  
Flicker or banding appears during live view or movie recording: Choose an option for Flicker reduction  
that matches the frequency of the local AC power supply (0 200).  
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available in all modes.  
Shooting (P, S, A, M)  
Shutter-release disabled:  
Non-CPU lens is attached: rotate camera mode dial to M (0 228).  
Mode dial rotated to S after shutter speed of “Bulb” or “Time” selected in mode M: choose  
new shutter speed (0 85).  
If white-balance bracketing is active, shutter release will be disabled and viewfinder  
exposure-count display will flash if there is insufficient space on memory card to record all  
images in bracketing sequence. Insert new memory card.  
Full range of shutter speeds not available:  
Flash in use (0 66).  
When On is selected for Movie settings > Manual movie settings in the shooting menu,  
the range of available shutter speed varies with the frame rate (0 129).  
Can not select desired aperture: Range of available apertures varies with lens used.  
Colors are unnatural:  
Adjust white balance to match light source (0 101).  
Adjust Set Picture Control settings (0 111).  
Can not measure white balance: Subject is too dark or too bright (0 106).  
Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance: Image was not created with D5300 (0 107).  
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for sharpening, contrast, or  
saturation. For consistent results over a series of photos, choose another setting (0 113).  
Metering can not be changed: Autoexposure lock is in effect (0 91).  
Exposure compensation can not be used: Choose mode P, S, or A (0 82, 92).  
Noise (reddish areas or other artifacts) appears in long time-exposures: Turn long-exposure noise  
reduction on (0 180).  
Playback  
NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF (RAW)+JPEG (0 60).  
Some pictures are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder. Note that Current is  
automatically selected after photograph is taken (0 175).  
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:  
Select On for Rotate tall (0 176).  
Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0 202).  
Photo is displayed in image review (0 176).  
Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken (0 202).  
   
Can not delete picture:  
Picture is protected: remove protection (0 143).  
Memory card is locked (0 12).  
Can not retouch picture: Photo can not be further edited with this camera (0 205).  
Can not change print order:  
Memory card is full: delete pictures (0 15, 146).  
Memory card is locked (0 12).  
Can not select photo for printing: Photo is in NEF (RAW) format. Create JPEG copy using NEF (RAW)  
processing or transfer to computer and print using supplied software or Capture NX 2 (0 153,  
Picture is not displayed on TV:  
Choose correct video mode (0 202) or output resolution (0 166).  
A/V (0 164) or HDMI (0 165) cable is not correctly connected.  
Camera does not respond to remote control for HDMI-CEC television:  
Select On for HDMI > Device control in the setup menu (0 166).  
Adjust HDMI-CEC settings for the television as described in documentation provided with  
the device.  
Can not transfer photos to computer: OS not compatible with camera or transfer software. Use card  
reader to copy photos to computer (0 152).  
Photos are not displayed in Capture NX 2: Update to latest version (0 236).  
Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 does not have desired effect: Image sensor cleaning changes the  
position of dust on the image sensor. Image Dust Off reference data recorded before image  
sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor  
cleaning is performed. Image Dust Off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is  
performed can not be used with photographs taken before image sensor cleaning is  
performed (0 199).  
Location Data  
The camera is unable or slow to acquire a satellite signal: Local geographic and atmospheric conditions  
may prevent or delay the acquisition of location data. For best results, choose a location with  
an unobstructed view of the sky. The built-in location data unit may take some time to acquire  
a signal immediately after the battery is inserted or when the record location data function is  
enabled for the first time, or after an extended period of disuse. Update the assisted GPS file  
Location data are not recorded with photographs: Check signal strength (0 75). The camera will only  
record location data if a # or $ indicator appears in the information display; data will not be  
recorded if the indicator is flashing.  
Location data are incorrect: The accuracy of location data may vary by up to several hundred  
meters depending signal quality and local topographic conditions.  
Can not update the assisted GPS file:  
Confirm that the camera clock is set (0 201).  
Confirm that the memory card inserted in the camera contains an assisted GPS file and that  
the file is in the correct folder (0 80).  
The file may be corrupt. Download the file again.  
Can not start a new track log:  
Confirm that the camera clock is set (0 201).  
If the camera is already recording a track log, select Location data > Create log > End to  
end the current log before starting a new log.  
The memory card is locked, full, or not inserted (0 12, 15), or the maximum number of log  
files (36 files per day, with a maximum total of 100 files per card) has been reached. If the  
maximum number of files is exceeded, format the current memory card or insert another  
card; if the card is full, insert another card or delete unwanted files.  
Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks)  
Smart devices do not display the camera SSID (network name):  
Confirm that Enable is selected for Wi-Fi > Network connection in the camera setup menu  
Try turning the smart device Wi-Fi off and then on again.  
Miscellaneous  
Date of recording is not correct: Set camera clock (0 14, 201).  
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available at certain combinations of settings  
or when no memory card is inserted (0 12, 205, 248).  
     
Error Messages  
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder and  
monitor.  
A Warning Icons  
A flashing d in the monitor or s in the viewfinder indicates that a warning or error message  
can be displayed in the monitor by pressing the W (Q) button.  
Indicator  
Monitor  
Viewfinder  
Solution  
0
Lock lens aperture ring at  
minimum aperture (largest  
f/-number).  
B
Set lens aperture ring to minimum aperture  
(flashes) (highest f-number).  
Attach non-IX NIKKOR lens.  
If non-CPU lens is attached, select mode M.  
F/s  
(flashes)  
Lens not attached  
Shutter release disabled.  
Recharge battery.  
d/s  
(flashes) battery.  
Turn camera off and recharge or replace  
This battery cannot be used.  
Choose battery designated  
for use in this camera.  
Initialization error. Turn  
camera off and then on  
again.  
Battery level is low.  
Complete operation and turn  
camera off immediately.  
d
(flashes)  
Use Nikon-approved battery.  
d/k Turn camera off, remove and replace battery,  
(flashes) and then turn camera on again.  
End cleaning and turn camera off and  
recharge or replace battery.  
14,  
Clock not set  
Set camera clock.  
S/s  
(flashes) correctly inserted.  
Turn camera off and confirm that card is  
No SD card inserted  
Memory card is locked.  
(
Memory card is locked (write protected). Slide  
Slide lock to “write” position. (flashes) card write-protect switch to “write” position.  
Use approved card.  
Format card. If problem persists, card may  
be damaged. Contact Nikon-authorized  
service representative.  
This memory card cannot be  
used. Card may be damaged.  
Insert another card.  
Error creating new folder. Delete files or  
insert new memory card.  
Insert new memory card.  
12,  
(/k  
(flashes)  
Eye-Fi card is still emitting wireless signal  
after Disable has been selected for Eye-Fi  
upload. To terminate wireless transmission,  
turn the camera off and remove the card.  
Not available if Eye-Fi card is  
locked.  
(/k Eye-Fi card is locked (write protected). Slide  
(flashes) card write-protect switch to “write” position.  
       
Indicator  
Monitor  
This card is not formatted.  
Format the card.  
Viewfinder  
T
Solution  
0
Format card or turn camera off and insert new 12,  
(flashes) memory card.  
Reduce quality or size.  
Delete photographs.  
Insert new memory card.  
j/A/s  
(flashes)  
Card is full  
Camera can not focus using autofocus.  
20,  
(flashes) Change composition or focus manually.  
Use a lower ISO sensitivity.  
Use commercial ND filter.  
In mode:  
Subject is too bright  
Subject is too dark  
S
A
Increase shutter speed  
Choose a smaller aperture (higher  
f-number)  
s
% Choose another shooting mode  
Use a higher ISO sensitivity.  
Use flash.  
In mode:  
S
(flashes)  
Lower shutter speed  
Choose a larger aperture (lower  
f-number)  
A
A
(flashes)  
&
No “Bulb” in S mode  
No “Time” in S mode  
No “Bulb” in HDR mode  
No “Time” in HDR mode  
Change shutter speed or select mode M.  
(flashes)  
A
(flashes)  
&
Change shutter speed.  
Turn HDR off.  
(flashes)  
Menus and playback are not available while  
Interval timer shooting  
interval timer photography is in progress. Turn 68  
camera off.  
Flash has fired at full power. Check photo in  
monitor; if underexposed, adjust settings and  
try again.  
N
(flashes)  
Use the flash.  
Change distance to subject, aperture, flash 66,  
range, or ISO sensitivity.  
Lens focal length is less than 18 mm: use a  
longer focal length.  
N/s  
(flashes)  
Optional SB-400 or SB-300 flash unit  
attached: flash is in bounce position or focus  
distance is very short. Continue shooting; if  
necessary, increase focus distance to  
prevent shadows from appearing in  
photograph.  
Indicator  
Monitor  
Flash error  
Viewfinder  
Solution  
0
Error occurred updating firmware for optional  
flash unit. Contact Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
s
(flashes)  
Release shutter. If error persists or appears  
frequently, consult Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
Error. Press shutter release  
button again.  
O
(flashes)  
Start-up error. Contact a  
Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
Consult Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
Metering error  
Unable to start live view.  
Please wait for camera to  
cool.  
Wait for the internal circuits to cool before  
resuming live view or movie recording.  
Folder selected for playback contains no  
images (note that this message will be  
displayed if memory card is inserted after  
Current is selected for Playback folder in  
playback menu and playback started before  
any pictures are taken). Insert another  
memory card or select All for Playback folder.  
File can not be played back on camera.  
Images created with other devices can not be  
retouched.  
12,  
Folder contains no images.  
Cannot display this file.  
Cannot select this file.  
Memory card does not contain NEF (RAW)  
images for use with NEF (RAW) processing.  
Multiple smart devices are attempting to  
connect to camera simultaneously. Wait a few 168  
minutes before trying again.  
No image for retouching.  
Could not connect; multiple  
devices detected. Try again  
later.  
Select Disable for Wi-Fi > Network  
connection, then select Enable again.  
Turn camera off and try again after waiting for  
camera to cool.  
Check printer. To resume, select Continue (if  
available).  
Error  
Network access not available  
until camera cools.  
*
Check printer.  
Paper is not selected size. Insert paper of  
correct size and select Continue.  
*
Check paper.  
Paper jam.  
*
Clear jam and select Continue.  
Insert paper of selected size and select  
Continue.  
Check ink. To resume, select Continue.  
Replace ink and select Continue.  
*
Out of paper.  
*
*
Check ink supply.  
Out of ink.  
* See printer manual for more information.  
Specifications  
Nikon D5300 Digital Camera  
Type  
Type  
Lens mount  
Single-lens reflex digital camera  
Nikon F mount (with AF contacts)  
Effective angle of view Nikon DX format; focal length equivalent to approx. 1.5× that of lenses  
with FX format angle of view  
Effective pixels  
Effective pixels  
24.2 million  
Image sensor  
Image sensor  
Total pixels  
23.5 × 15.6 mm CMOS sensor  
24.78 million  
Dust-reduction System Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data (optional  
Capture NX 2 software required)  
Storage  
Image size (pixels)  
6000 × 4000 (Large)  
4496 × 3000 (Medium)  
2992 × 2000 (Small)  
File format  
NEF (RAW): 12- or 14 bit, compressed  
JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx.  
1 : 8), or basic (approx. 1 : 16) compression  
NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both NEF (RAW) and  
JPEG formats  
Picture Control System Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait, Landscape; selected  
Picture Control can be modified; storage for custom Picture Controls  
Media  
File system  
SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-I compliant SDHC and SDXC memory cards  
DCF (Design Rule for Camera File System) 2.0, DPOF (Digital Print Order  
Format), Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras)  
2.3, PictBridge  
Viewfinder  
Viewfinder  
Eye-level pentamirror single-lens reflex viewfinder  
Approx. 95% horizontal and 95% vertical  
Frame coverage  
Magnification  
Eyepoint  
Diopter adjustment  
Focusing screen  
Reflex mirror  
Lens aperture  
Approx. 0.82 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, –1.0 m–1  
)
18 mm (–1.0 m–1; from center surface of viewfinder eyepiece lens)  
–1.7–+1.0 m–1  
Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VII screen  
Quick return  
Instant return, electronically controlled  
     
Lens  
Compatible lenses  
Autofocus is available with AF-S and AF-I lenses. Autofocus is not  
available with other type G and D lenses, AF lenses (IX NIKKOR and lenses  
for the F3AF are not supported), and AI-P lenses. Non-CPU lenses can be  
used in mode M, but the camera exposure meter will not function.  
The electronic rangefinder can be used with lenses that have a  
maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
Shutter  
Type  
Speed  
Flash sync speed  
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane shutter  
1/4000 – 30 s in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV; Bulb; Time  
X=1/200 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/200 s or slower  
Release  
Release mode  
8 (single frame), ! (continuous L), 9 (continuous H), J (quiet  
shutter release), E (self-timer), " (delayed remote; ML-L3), # (quick-  
response remote; ML-L3); interval timer photography supported  
!: Up to 3 fps  
Frame advance rate  
9: Up to 5 fps (JPEG and 12-bit NEF/RAW) or 4 fps (14-bit NEF/RAW)  
Note: Frame rates assume continuous-servo AF, manual or shutter-  
priority auto exposure, a shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster, Release  
selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection), and other  
settings at default values.  
Self-timer  
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures  
Exposure  
Metering mode  
Metering method  
TTL exposure metering using 2016-pixel RGB sensor  
Matrix metering: 3D color matrix metering II (type G, E, and D lenses);  
color matrix metering II (other CPU lenses)  
Center-weighted metering: Weight of 75% given to 8-mm circle in center  
of frame  
Spot metering: Meters 3.5-mm circle (about 2.5% of frame) centered on  
selected focus point  
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4  
lens, 20 °C/68 °F)  
Exposure meter  
coupling  
Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV  
Spot metering: 2–20 EV  
CPU  
Mode  
Auto modes (i auto; j auto, flash off ); programmed auto with flexible  
program (P); shutter-priority auto (S); aperture-priority auto (A); manual  
(M); scene modes (k portrait; l landscape; p child; m sports; n close up; o night  
portrait; r night landscape; s party/indoor; t beach/snow; u sunset; vdusk/dawn; w pet  
portrait; xcandlelight; y blossom; z autumn colors; 0 food); special effects modes  
(% night vision; g color sketch; ' toy camera effect; ( miniature effect; 3 selective color;  
1 silhouette; 2 high key; 3 low key; ) HDR painting)  
Exposure compensation Can be adjusted by –5 – +5 EV in increments of 1/3 or 1/2 EV in P, S, A, and  
M modes  
Bracketing  
Exposure bracketing: 3 shots in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV  
White balance bracketing: 3 shots in steps of 1  
Active D-Lighting bracketing: 2 shots  
Exposure lock  
Luminosity locked at detected value with A (L) button  
       
Exposure  
ISO sensitivity  
(Recommended  
Exposure Index)  
Active D-Lighting  
ISO 100 – 12800 in steps of 1/3 EV. Can also be set to approx. 0.3, 0.7, or  
1 EV (ISO 25600 equivalent) above ISO 12800; auto ISO sensitivity control  
available  
Y Auto, Z Extra high, P High, Q Normal, R Low, ! Off  
Focus  
Autofocus  
Nikon Multi-CAM 4800DX autofocus sensor module with TTL phase  
detection, 39 focus points (including 9 cross-type sensor), and AF-assist  
illuminator (range approx. 0.5–3 m/1 ft 8 in.–9 ft 10 in.)  
–1 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)  
Detection range  
Lens servo  
Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); continuous-servo AF (AF-C); auto  
AF-S/AF-C selection (AF-A); predictive focus tracking activated  
automatically according to subject status  
Manual focus (MF): Electronic rangefinder can be used  
Focus point  
AF-area mode  
Can be selected from 39 or 11 focus points  
Single-point AF, 9-, 21-, or 39- point dynamic-area AF, 3D-tracking, auto-  
area AF  
Focus lock  
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button halfway (single-  
servo AF) or by pressing A (L) button  
Flash  
Built-in flash  
i, k, p, n, o, s, w, g, ' : Auto flash with auto pop-up  
P, S, A, M, 0: Manual pop-up with button release  
Guide Number  
Flash control  
Approx. 12/39, 13/43 with manual flash (m/ft, ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)  
TTL: i-TTL flash control using 2016-pixel RGB sensor is available with  
built-in flash and SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-400, or  
SB-300; i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used with matrix and  
center-weighted metering, standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR with spot  
metering  
Flash mode  
Auto, auto with red-eye reduction, auto slow sync, auto slow sync with  
red-eye reduction, fill-flash, red-eye reduction, slow sync, slow sync with  
red-eye reduction, rear-curtain with slow sync, rear-curtain sync, off  
–3 – +1 EV in increments of 1/3 or 1/2 EV  
Flash compensation  
Flash-ready indicator Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit is fully charged; flashes  
after flash is fired at full output  
Accessory shoe  
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and safety lock  
Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, or  
System (CLS)  
Sync terminal  
SB-700 as a master flash or SU-800 as commander; Flash Color  
Information Communication supported with all CLS-compatible flash  
units  
AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately)  
White balance  
White balance  
Auto, incandescent, fluorescent (7 types), direct sunlight, flash, cloudy,  
shade, preset manual, all except preset manual with fine-tuning.  
     
Live view  
Lens servo  
Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); full-time-servo AF (AF-F)  
Manual focus (MF)  
AF-area mode  
Autofocus  
Face-priority AF, wide-area AF, normal-area AF, subject-tracking AF  
Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera selects focus point  
automatically when face-priority AF or subject-tracking AF is selected)  
Available in i and j modes  
Automatic scene  
selection  
Movie  
Metering  
Metering method  
TTL exposure metering using main image sensor  
Matrix  
Frame size (pixels) and 1920 × 1080, 60p (progressive)/50p/30p/25p/24p, high/normal  
frame rate  
1280 × 720, 60p/50p, high/normal  
640 × 424, 30p/25p, high/normal  
Frame rates of 30p (actual frame rate 29.97 fps) and 60p (actual frame  
rate 59.94 fps) are available when NTSC is selected for video mode. 25p  
and 50p are available when PAL is selected for video mode. Actual frame  
rate when 24p is selected is 23.976 fps.  
File format  
MOV  
Video compression  
H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding  
Audio recording format Linear PCM  
Audio recording device Built-in or external stereo microphone; sensitivity adjustable  
ISO sensitivity  
ISO 100–12800; can also be set to approx. 0.3, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO 25600  
equivalent) above ISO 12800  
Monitor  
Monitor  
8.1 cm/3.2-in. (3 : 2), approx. 1037k-dot (720 × 480 × 3 = 1,036,800 dots),  
vari-angle TFT monitor with 170 ° viewing angle, approx. 100% frame  
coverage, and brightness adjustment  
Playback  
Playback  
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 12, or 80 images or calendar) playback with  
playback zoom, movie playback, photo and/or movie slide shows,  
histogram display, highlights, auto image rotation, picture rating, and  
image comment (up to 36 characters)  
Interface  
USB  
Hi-Speed USB  
Video output  
HDMI output  
Accessory terminal  
NTSC, PAL  
Type C mini-pin HDMI connector  
Wireless remote controllers: WR-1, WR-R10 (available separately)  
Remote cords: MC-DC2 (available separately)  
GPS units: GP-1/GP-1A (available separately)  
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter); supports optional ME-1 stereo  
microphones  
Audio input  
 
Wireless  
Standards  
Communications  
protocols  
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g  
IEEE 802.11b: DSSS/CCK  
IEEE 802.11g: OFDM  
Operating frequency 2412–2462 MHz (channels 1–11)  
Range (line of sight) Approximately 30 m/98 ft (assumes no interference; range may vary with  
signal strength and presence or absence of obstacles)  
Data rate  
54 Mbps  
Maximum logical data rates according to IEEE standard. Actual rates may  
differ.  
Security  
Authentication: Open system, WPA2-PSK  
Encryption: AES  
Wireless setup  
Supports WPS  
Access protocols  
Infrastructure  
Location data  
Receiving frequency 1575.42 MHz (C/A code)  
Geodesics  
WGS84  
Supported languages  
Supported languages Arabic, Bengali, Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Czech, Danish,  
Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hindi, Hungarian,  
Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian, Persian, Polish,  
Portuguese (Portugal and Brazil), Romanian, Russian, Spanish, Swedish,  
Tamil, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese  
Power source  
Battery  
AC adapter  
One rechargeable Li-ion EN-EL14a battery  
EH-5b AC adapter; requires EP-5A power connector (available  
separately)  
Tripod socket  
Tripod socket  
1/4 in. (ISO 1222)  
Dimensions/weight  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 125 × 98 × 76 mm (49.2 × 3.9 × 3 in.)  
Weight  
Approx. 530 g (1 lb 2.7 oz) with battery and memory card but without  
body cap; approx. 480 g/1 lb 0.9 oz (camera body only)  
Operating environment  
Temperature  
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)  
Humidity  
85% or less (no condensation)  
• Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery operating at the  
temperature specified by the Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA): 23 3 °C (73.4 5.4 °F).  
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this  
manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result  
from any mistakes that this manual may contain.  
MH-24 Battery Charger  
Rated input  
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.2 A maximum  
Rated output  
DC 8.4 V/0.9 A  
Supported batteries  
Charging time  
Nikon Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14a  
Approx. 1 hour and 50 minutes at an ambient temperature of 25 °C/77 °F  
when no charge remains  
Operating temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 70 × 26 × 97 mm (2.8 × 1.0 × 3.8 in.), excluding plug adapter  
Weight  
Approx. 96 g (3.4 oz), excluding plug adapter  
EN-EL14a Rechargeable Li-ion Battery  
Type  
Rated capacity  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery  
7.2 V/1230 mAh  
Operating temperature 0°C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 38 × 53 × 14 mm (1.5 × 2.1 × 0.6 in.)  
Weight  
Approx. 49 g (1.7 oz), excluding terminal cover  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR Lens  
Type  
Type G AF-S DX lens with built-in CPU and F mount  
Focal length  
18 – 140 mm  
Maximum aperture  
Lens construction  
Angle of view  
Focal length scale  
f/3.5 – 5.6  
17 elements in 12 groups (including 1 ED lens element, 1 aspherical lens element)  
76° – 11° 30 ´  
Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 50, 70, 140)  
Distance information Output to camera  
Zoom  
Manual zoom using independent zoom ring  
Focusing  
Nikon Internal Focusing (IF) System with autofocus controlled by Silent  
Wave Motor and separate focus ring for manual focus  
Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)  
Vibration reduction  
Minimum focus distance 0.45 m (1.48 ft) from focal plane (0 58) at all zoom positions  
Diaphragm blades  
Diaphragm  
7 (rounded diaphragm opening)  
Fully automatic  
Aperture range  
18 mm focal length: f/3.5 – 22  
140 mm focal length: f/5.6 – 38  
The minimum aperture displayed may vary depending on the size of the  
exposure increment selected with the camera.  
Full aperture  
Metering  
Filter-attachment size 67 mm (P = 0.75 mm)  
Dimensions  
Approx. 78 mm maximum diameter × 97 mm (distance from camera lens-mount  
flange)  
Weight  
Approx. 490 g (17.3 oz)  
   
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR Lens  
Type  
Type G AF-S lens with built-in CPU and F mount  
Focal length  
18–55 mm  
Maximum aperture  
Lens construction  
Angle of view  
Focal length scale  
f/3.5–5.6  
11 elements in 8 groups (including 1 aspherical lens element)  
76 °–28 ° 50 ´  
Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 45, 55)  
Distance information Output to camera  
Zoom  
Manual zoom using independent zoom ring  
Focusing  
Autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and separate focus ring for  
manual focus  
Vibration reduction  
Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)  
Minimum focus distance 0.28 m (0.92 ft) from focal plane (0 58) at all zoom positions  
Diaphragm blades  
Diaphragm  
7 (rounded diaphragm opening)  
Fully automatic  
Aperture range  
18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22  
55 mm focal length: f/5.6–36  
Metering  
Full aperture  
Filter-attachment size 52 mm (P=0.75 mm)  
Dimensions  
Weight  
Approx. 73 mm diameter × 79.5 mm (distance from camera lens-mount flange)  
Approx. 265 g (9.3 oz)  
Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this  
manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result  
from any mistakes that this manual may contain.  
Lenses  
This section describes the features available with AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm  
f/3.5–5.6G ED VR and AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lenses. The lens  
generally used in this manual for illustrative purposes is the AF-S DX NIKKOR  
18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR.  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
Focal length mark  
Focal length scale  
Lens cap  
Lens mounting mark (0 13)  
CPU contacts (0 227)  
Rear lens cap  
A-M mode switch (0 18, 57)  
Zoom ring (0 18)  
Focus ring (0 57, 125)  
Vibration reduction ON/OFF switch (0 267)  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR  
Focal length mark  
Focal length scale  
Lens cap  
Lens mounting mark (0 13)  
CPU contacts (0 227)  
Rear lens cap  
A-M mode switch (0 18, 57)  
Focus ring (0 57, 125)  
Vibration reduction ON/OFF switch (0 267)  
Zoom ring (0 18)  
The AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR and AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm  
f/3.5–5.6G VR are for use exclusively with Nikon DX format digital cameras.  
A Focusing with AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR Lenses  
When single-servo AF (AF-S) is selected as the camera focus mode and the lens A-M switch  
is set to A, focus can be adjusted by keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway after  
the autofocus operation is complete and manually rotating the focus ring. Do not rotate the  
focus ring until the autofocus operation is complete. To refocus using autofocus, press the  
shutter-release button halfway again.  
             
Vibration Reduction (VR)  
The lenses described in this section support vibration reduction (VR), which reduces  
blur caused by camera shake even when the camera is panned, allowing shutter  
speeds for DX format cameras to be slowed by approximately 3 EV at a focal length of  
55 mm in the case of the AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR, or 4 EV at a focal  
length of 140 mm in the case of the AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
(according to CIPA guidelines; effects vary with the user and shooting conditions).  
To use vibration reduction, slide the vibration reduction switch  
to ON. Vibration reduction is activated when the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway, reducing the effects of camera shake  
on the image in the viewfinder and simplifying the process of  
framing the subject and focusing in both autofocus and manual  
focus modes. When the camera is panned, vibration reduction  
applies only to motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera  
is panned horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be  
applied only to vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the  
camera smoothly in a wide arc.  
Turn vibration reduction off when the camera is securely mounted on a tripod, but  
leave it on if the tripod head is not secured or when using a monopod.  
D Vibration Reduction  
Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration reduction is in effect. If power  
to the lens is cut while vibration reduction is on, the lens may rattle when shaken. This is not  
a malfunction, and can be corrected by reattaching the lens and turning the camera on.  
Vibration reduction is disabled while the built-in flash is charging. When vibration reduction  
is active, the image in the viewfinder may jiggle after the shutter is released. This does not  
indicate a malfunction; wait for the image in the viewfinder to stabilize before shooting.  
   
A Using the Built-in Flash  
When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of at least 0.6 m (2 ft) and  
remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting (shadows created where the end of the lens  
obscures the built-in flash).  
Shadow  
Shadow  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR:  
Minimum distance  
without vignetting  
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
2.5 m/8 ft 2 in.  
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
Camera  
Zoom position  
18 mm  
24–140 mm  
18 mm  
D7100/D7000/D300 series/D200/D100  
D90/D80/D50  
24 mm  
35–140 mm  
24–140 mm  
35–140 mm  
D5300/D5200/D5100/D5000/D3200/D3100/  
D3000/D70 series/D60/D40 series  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR:  
Camera  
Minimum distance without vignetting  
D7100/D7000/D5300/D5200/D5100/D5000/  
D3200/D3100/D3000/D300 series/D200/  
D100/D90/D80/D70 series/D60/D50/  
D40 series  
No vignetting at any focus distance  
Because the built-in flash units for the D100 and D70 can only cover the angle of view of a  
lens with a focal of 20 mm or more; vignetting will occur at a focal length of 18 mm.  
A Supplied Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
67 mm snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-67  
Rear Lens Cap  
A Optional Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
67 mm screw-on filters  
LF-1 and LF-4 rear lens caps  
Flexible Lens Pouch CL-1018  
Bayonet Hood HB-32  
Align the lens hood mounting mark () with the lens hood alignment mark ( ) and then  
rotate the hood (w) until the mark is aligned with the lens hood lock mark (—{).  
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol on its base and avoid  
gripping it too tightly. Vignetting may occur if the hood is not correctly attached.  
The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use.  
A Supplied Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR  
52 mm Snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-52  
Rear Lens Cap  
A Optional Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR  
52 mm screw-on filters  
LF-1 and LF-4 rear lens caps  
Flexible Lens Pouch CL-0815  
Lens Hood HB-45  
q
Press the latches q and attach or remove  
the hood w.  
w
Vignetting may occur if the hood is not  
correctly attached.  
The hood can be reversed and mounted on  
the lens when not in use.  
q
D Lens Care  
Keep the CPU contacts clean.  
Use a blower to remove dust and lint from the lens surfaces. To remove smudges and  
fingerprints, apply a small amount of ethanol or lens cleaner to a soft, clean cotton cloth  
or lens-cleaning tissue and clean from the center outwards using a circular motion, taking  
care not to leave smears or touch the glass with your fingers.  
Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to clean the lens.  
The lens hood or NC filters can be used to protect the front lens element.  
Attach the front and rear caps before placing the lens in its flexible pouch.  
When a lens hood is attached, do not pick up or hold the lens or camera using only the  
hood.  
If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a cool, dry location to prevent  
mold and rust. Do not store in direct sunlight or with naphtha or camphor moth balls.  
Keep the lens dry. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.  
Leaving the lens in extremely hot locations could damage or warp parts made from  
reinforced plastic.  
A A Note on Wide-Angle Lenses  
Autofocus may not provide the desired results with wide– and super-wide–angle lenses in  
the following situations:  
1 The subject does not fill the focus point.  
If the subject does not fill the focus point, the camera may  
focus on the background and the subject may be out of focus.  
Example: A far-off portrait  
subject at some distance  
from the background  
2 The subject contains many fine details.  
The camera may have difficulty focusing on subjects that  
contain many fine details or that are lacking in contrast.  
Example: A field of flowers  
In these cases, use manual focus, or use focus lock to focus on another subject at  
the same distance and then recompose the photograph. For more information, see  
“Getting Good Results with Autofocus” (0 52).  
Supported Standards  
DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File Systems (DCF) is a standard widely  
used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes  
of camera.  
DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard that allows  
pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card.  
Exif version 2.3: The D5300 supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital  
Still Cameras) version 2.3, a standard in which information stored with  
photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output  
on Exif-compliant printers.  
PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and  
printer industries, allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without  
first transferring them to a computer.  
HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces  
used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual  
data and control signals to HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable connection.  
A Trademark Information  
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc., in the United States and/or  
other countries and is used under license. Mac OS and OS X are registered trademarks of  
Apple Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows  
Vista are either registered trademarks, or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries. PictBridge logo is a trademark. The SD, SDHC, and SDXC logos  
are trademarks of the SD-3C, LLC. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.  
Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. All  
other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with  
your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.  
A Conformity Marking  
The standards with which the camera complies can be viewed using the Conformity  
marking option in the setup menu (0 204).  
A FreeType License (FreeType2)  
Portions of this software are copyright © 2013 The FreeType Project  
(http://www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.  
A MIT License (HarfBuzz)  
Portions of this software are copyright © 2013 The HarfBuzz Project  
(http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz). All rights reserved.  
           
Memory Card Capacity  
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on  
a 16 GB SanDisk Extreme Pro SDHC UHS-I card at different image quality and size  
settings.  
Image quality  
NEF (RAW),  
Compressed, 14-bit  
Image size  
File size 1  
No. of images 1  
Buffer capacity 2  
23.8 MB  
437  
6
NEF (RAW),  
Compressed, 12-bit  
19.0 MB  
524  
13  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
12.0 MB  
7.4 MB  
3.8 MB  
6.3 MB  
3.8 MB  
2.0 MB  
2.7 MB  
1.9 MB  
1.0 MB  
1000  
1700  
3300  
2000  
3300  
6300  
3900  
6500  
12,100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
JPEG fine  
JPEG normal  
JPEG basic  
1 All figures are approximate. Results will vary with card type, camera settings, and scene recorded.  
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100. Drops when long  
exposure noise reduction (0 180), auto distortion control (0 179), or Print date (0 190) is on.  
   
Battery Life  
The movie footage or number of shots that can be recorded with fully-charged  
batteries varies with the condition of the battery, temperature, the interval between  
shots, and the length of time menus are displayed. Sample figures for EN-EL14a  
(1230 mAh) batteries are given below.  
Photographs, single-frame release mode (CIPA standard 1): Approximately 600 shots  
Photographs, continuous release mode (Nikon standard 2): Approximately 2000 shots  
Movies: Approximately 50 minutes at 1080/60p and 1080/50p 3  
1 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F ( 3 °C/5.4 °F) with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm  
f/3.5–5.6G VR lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity  
to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once every  
30 s; after photograph is taken, monitor is turned on for 4 s; tester waits for  
standby timer to expire after monitor is turned off; flash fired at full power once  
every other shot. Live view not used.  
2 Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lens  
under the following test conditions: vibration reduction off, continuous high-  
speed release mode, focus mode set to AF-C, image quality set to JPEG basic,  
image size set to M (medium), white balance set to v, ISO sensitivity set to  
ISO 100, shutter speed 1/250 s, focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three  
times after shutter-release button has been pressed halfway for 3 s; six shots are  
then taken in succession and monitor turned on for 4 s and then turned off;  
cycle repeated once standby timer has expired.  
3 Measured at 23°C/73.4°F ( 3°C/5.4°F) with the camera at default settings and an  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lens under conditions specified by the  
Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA). Individual movies can be up  
to 20 minutes in length or 4 GB in size; recording may end before these limits are  
reached if the camera temperature rises.  
The following can reduce battery life:  
Using the monitor  
Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway  
Repeated autofocus operations  
Taking NEF (RAW) photographs  
Slow shutter speeds  
Using the built-in Wi-Fi or location data functions, or using an optional location  
data unit  
Using an Eye-Fi card  
Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses  
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL14a batteries:  
Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance.  
Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge if left  
unused.  
   
Index  
N (Spot metering) ......................... 90  
o (auto flash) ........................... 63  
j (red-eye reduction)......... 63, 65  
p (slow sync) .................... 63, 65  
q (rear-curtain sync)............. 65  
Y (Flash compensation) ............ 93  
E (Exposure compensation)...... 92  
e (AE bracketing).................108  
f (WB bracketing) ..............108  
g (ADL bracketing) .....................108  
d (Help)................................................8  
m (White balance).......................101  
L (Preset manual) .....................104  
3 (“Beep” indicator).....................187  
I (focus indicator).... 20, 55, 57, 91  
N (flash-ready indicator) 4, 23, 235  
a (live view) .......... 24, 27, 118, 126  
P button ..................................... 7, 135  
t (Memory buffer)................47, 272  
Aperture .............................. 83, 86, 87  
Aperture-priority auto.................. 86  
Assign AE-L/AF-L button ...........194  
Assign Fn button ..........................193  
Auto (White balance)..................101  
Auto bracketing.................. 108, 192  
Auto distortion control ..............179  
Auto flash.......................................... 63  
Auto image rotation....................202  
Auto info display ..........................199  
Auto ISO sensitivity control......181  
Auto off timers ..............................186  
Auto-area AF (AF-area mode).... 53  
Autoexposure lock......................... 91  
Autofocus................51–56, 119–121  
Auto-servo AF.................................. 51  
Available settings.........................248  
Symbols  
i (Auto mode)............................3, 19  
j (Auto (flash off) mode) .......3, 19  
k (Portrait) ...................................3, 31  
l (Landscape).............................3, 31  
p (Child)........................................3, 31  
m (Sports)......................................3, 32  
n (Close up) .................................3, 32  
h (Scene)...............................3, 33  
o (Night portrait)........................... 33  
r (Night landscape)...................... 33  
s (Party/indoor)............................. 34  
t (Beach/snow).............................. 34  
u (Sunset)......................................... 34  
v (Dusk/dawn) ............................... 35  
w (Pet portrait) ............................... 35  
x (Candlelight)................................. 35  
y (Blossom)...................................... 36  
z (Autumn colors)......................... 36  
0 (Food) ............................................. 36  
q (Special effects) ..............3, 37  
% (Night vision) ..........................3, 37  
g (Color sketch) ..................3, 38, 41  
' (Toy camera effect) ........3, 38, 42  
( (Miniature effect) ...........3, 38, 42  
3 (Selective color)..............3, 39, 43  
1 (Silhouette)..............................3, 39  
2 (High key).................................3, 39  
3 (Low key)..................................3, 40  
) (HDR painting)........................3, 40  
P (Programmed auto).........3, 82, 84  
S (Shutter-priority auto) ....3, 82, 85  
A (Aperture-priority auto).3, 82, 86  
M (Manual) .............................3, 82, 87  
U (flexible program) ...................... 84  
8 (Single frame) ............................ 45  
! (Continuous L).................. 45, 46  
9 (Continuous H)................. 45, 46  
E (Self-timer)............................ 45, 49  
" (Delayed remote (ML-L3))... 45,  
B
Battery............................. 11, 236, 264  
Beep..................................................187  
Black-and-white............................208  
Blue intensifier (Filter effects) ..209  
Body cap..................................... 1, 237  
Border (PictBridge) ......................157  
Bracketing............................. 108, 192  
Built-in AF-assist illuminator ..... 52,  
Numerics  
2016-pixel RGB sensor..... 192,227,  
3D color matrix metering..........227  
3D-tracking (AF-area mode) 53, 54  
A
A/V cable.........................................164  
AC adapter............................ 236, 239  
Access lamp...................................... 21  
Accessories .....................................236  
Accessory terminal accessories......  
Built-in flash ............................62, 230  
Bulb..................................................... 88  
Burst............................................. 46, 99  
C
Active D-Lighting........................... 94  
Add items (My Menu) .................223  
ADL bracketing (Auto bracketing  
set)...................................................108  
Adobe RGB .....................................179  
AE bracketing (Auto bracketing  
set)...................................................108  
AE lock................................................ 91  
AE-L ..................................................... 91  
AE-L/AF-L button................56, 91, 194  
AF...............................51–56, 119–121  
AF area brackets ...................... 15, 20  
AF-A..................................................... 51  
AF-area mode.........................53, 120  
AF-assist...........................................185  
AF-assist illuminator.............52, 229  
AF-C............................................51, 184  
AF-F...................................................119  
AF-S............................................51, 119  
A-GPS data........................................ 80  
A-M mode switch..................57, 266  
Angle of view.................................231  
Calendar playback .......................141  
Camera Control Pro 2..................236  
Capture NX 2..................................236  
CEC ....................................................166  
Center-weighted metering......... 90  
Charger ........................... 11, 236, 264  
Choose start/end point..............131  
Clean image sensor.....................241  
Clock ..........................................14, 201  
Clock battery.................................... 18  
Cloudy (White balance) .............101  
CLS.....................................................232  
Color balance.................................210  
Color outline ..................................216  
Color sketch ............................41, 216  
Color space.....................................179  
Color temperature .......................102  
Compatible lenses .......................226  
Conformity marking.......... 204, 271  
Continuous (Release mode) 45, 46  
Continuous-servo AF ...........51, 184  
CPU contacts..................................227  
# (Quick-response remote (ML-L3))  
J (Quiet shutter release)..... 45, 48  
c (Single-point AF) ..................... 53  
d (Dynamic-area AF) .................. 53  
e (Auto-area AF) .......................... 53  
f (3D-tracking)...................... 53, 54  
6 (Face-priority AF) .......... 120, 121  
7 (Wide-area AF) ............... 120, 121  
8 (Normal-area AF)........... 120, 121  
9 (Subject-tracking AF) 120, 121  
L (Matrix metering)...................... 90  
M (Center-weighted metering). 90  
   
CPU lens ..........................................226  
Create log...........................................76  
Creative Lighting System ..........232  
Cross screen (Filter effects).......209  
Custom Settings...........................182  
Cyanotype ......................................208  
Flash....................................23, 62, 232  
Flash (White balance).................101  
Flash cntrl for built-in flash.......192  
Flash compensation...................... 93  
Flash control ..................................192  
Flash mode.................................63, 65  
Flash range....................................... 66  
Flash ready indicator .......4, 23, 235  
Flash sync speed ...................66, 260  
Flexible program............................ 84  
Flicker reduction .................127, 200  
Fluorescent (White balance)...101,  
Fn button.........................................193  
f-number.....................................83, 86  
Focal length ...................................231  
Focal length scale ........................266  
Focal plane mark............................ 58  
Focus............... 51–58, 119121, 125  
Focus indicator............20, 55, 57, 91  
Focus lock ......................................... 55  
Focus mode.............................51, 119  
Image Dust Off ref photo..........199  
Image overlay................................211  
Image quality................................... 59  
Image review.................................176  
Image size......................................... 61  
Incandescent (White balance) 101  
Info display format ......................197  
In-focus indicator.......20, 55, 57, 91  
Information display................ 6, 197  
Infrared receiver ............................. 70  
Interval timer shooting................ 68  
ISO display......................................188  
ISO sensitivity.........................67, 180  
i-TTL ..................................................192  
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital  
SLR...................................................192  
D
Date and time.........................14, 201  
Date counter..................................190  
Date format.............................14, 201  
Daylight saving time............14, 201  
DCF version 2.0.............................271  
Delayed remote (ML-L3)........45, 70  
Delete...............................................146  
Delete all images..........................147  
Delete current image..................146  
Delete log ..........................................78  
Delete selected images .............147  
Device control (HDMI)................166  
Digital Print Order Format .......159,  
J
JPEG .................................................... 59  
JPEG basic......................................... 59  
JPEG fine............................................ 59  
JPEG normal..................................... 59  
Diopter adjustment control .......15,  
L
Focusing screen............................259  
Focusing the viewfinder.............. 15  
Focus-mode switch .................18, 57  
Format..............................................196  
Format memory card...........17, 196  
Frame interval (Slide show)......150  
Frame size/frame rate.................128  
Framing grid .........................123, 188  
Front-curtain sync.......................... 65  
Full-frame playback.....................135  
Full-time-servo AF .......................119  
Direct sunlight (White balance).....  
Landscape (Set Picture Control).....  
Distortion control ........................215  
D-Lighting ......................................207  
DPOF.............................. 159, 162, 271  
DPOF print order..........................162  
Dynamic-area AF.............................53  
Language.................................14, 201  
Large (Image size).......................... 61  
Lens...................................13, 226, 266  
Lens focus ring.......................57, 266  
Lens mount ..................................1, 58  
Lens vibration reduction switch.....  
Live view...................24, 27, 118, 126  
Location data..........xv, 74, 139, 237  
Location data unit.................81, 237  
Lock mirror up for cleaning......243  
Log list................................................ 78  
Long exposure NR .......................180  
Low-angle shots ................................5  
E
Edit movie..............................131, 134  
Electronic rangefinder.........57, 185  
EV steps for exposure cntrl.......186  
Exif version 2.3 ..............................271  
Exposure........................83, 90, 91, 92  
Exposure bracketing...................108  
Exposure compensation...............92  
Exposure delay mode.................189  
Exposure indicator................87, 122  
Exposure lock ...................................91  
Exposure meters..............................23  
Exposure mode................................82  
External microphone.........129, 237  
Eye-Fi upload.................................204  
G
GPS options...................................... 79  
Green intensifier (Filter effects)......  
H
M
H.264.................................................262  
HDMI........................................165, 271  
HDMI-CEC .......................................166  
HDR (high dynamic range)......... 96  
Help........................................................8  
Hi (Sensitivity) ................................. 67  
High definition.....................165, 271  
High Dynamic Range (HDR)....... 96  
High ISO NR....................................180  
High-angle shots...............................5  
Highlights ..............................136, 176  
Histogram.................... 137, 176, 210  
Manage Picture Control.............115  
Manual........................................ 57, 87  
Manual focus .................57, 119, 125  
Manual movie settings...............129  
Matrix metering.............................. 90  
Maximum aperture ..............57, 226  
Maximum sensitivity...................181  
Medium (Image size) .................... 61  
Memory buffer................................ 47  
Memory card ....... 12, 196, 238, 272  
Memory card capacity................272  
Metering............................................ 90  
Microphone....................................128  
Miniature effect .....................42, 218  
Minimum shutter speed............181  
F
Face-priority AF ............................120  
File information ............................136  
File number sequence................188  
Filter effects................. 113, 114, 209  
Filters................................................236  
Fine-tuning white balance .......103  
Firmware version..........................204  
Fisheye.............................................216  
I
Image comment...........................202  
Mirror........................................... 1, 243  
Mode dial .............................................3  
Monitor.................... 5, 118, 135, 196  
Monitor brightness......................196  
Monochrome.................................208  
Monochrome (Set Picture Control)  
Mounting mark......................13, 266  
MOV ..................................................189  
Movie quality.................................128  
Movie settings...............................128  
Movie-record button ...........28, 126  
Movies.......................................27, 126  
Multiple exposure.......................... 98  
My Menu .........................................223  
Print select......................................159  
Printing ............................................156  
Programmed auto.......................... 84  
Protecting photographs............143  
Push-button WPS.........................169  
Shutter-release button.. 21, 55, 91,  
Shutter-release button AE-L.....186  
Side-by-side comparison ..........221  
Single frame (Release mode) ..... 45  
Single-point AF (AF-area mode)53  
Single-servo AF......................51, 119  
Size .............................................61, 128  
Skylight (Filter effects)................209  
Slide show.......................................149  
Slot empty release lock..............194  
Slow sync ................................... 63, 65  
Small (Image size) .......................... 61  
Soft (Filter effects)........................209  
Special effects mode..................... 37  
Speedlight ......................................232  
Spot metering ................................. 90  
sRGB..................................................179  
SSID...................................................171  
Standard (Set Picture Control).111  
Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital  
SLR ...................................................192  
Standby timer.........................23, 186  
Start printing (PictBridge)158, 161  
Storage folder................................178  
Straighten .......................................215  
Subject-tracking AF.....................120  
Q
Quick retouch................................215  
Quick-response remote (ML-L3)45,  
Quiet shutter release ............. 45, 48  
R
Rangefinder....................................185  
Rank items (My Menu)................225  
Rating ..................................... 144, 150  
Rear-curtain sync ........................... 65  
Recent settings .............................222  
Record location data..................... 74  
Red intensifier (Filter effects) ...209  
Red-eye correction ......................207  
Red-eye reduction .................. 63, 65  
Release mode .................................. 45  
Remote control......................70, 237  
Remote cord ................. 88, 203, 237  
Remote on duration (ML-L3)....187  
Remote shutter release..............203  
Remove items (My Menu).........224  
Reset ................................ 72, 177, 183  
Reset custom settings ................183  
Reset shooting menu .................177  
Resize................................................214  
Retouch menu...............................205  
Reverse dial rotation...................194  
Reverse indicators........................194  
RGB.......................................... 137, 179  
RGB Histogram..............................137  
Rotate tall........................................176  
N
NEF (RAW)...................... 59, 178, 213  
NEF (RAW) processing................213  
NEF (RAW) recording ..................178  
Network connection...................169  
Neutral (Set Picture Control)....111  
Nikon Transfer 2............................153  
Non-CPU lens ................................228  
Normal-area AF.............................120  
Number of focus points.............184  
Number of shots...........................273  
T
O
Television ........................................164  
Thumbnail playback ...................140  
Time .................................................... 88  
Time stamp (PictBridge) ............157  
Time zone.................................14, 201  
Time zone and date.....................201  
Timer............................................ 49, 68  
Toning .................................... 113, 114  
Trim ...................................................208  
Trimming movies .........................131  
Type D lens .....................................227  
Type E lens......................................227  
Type G lens .....................................227  
Optional flash...................... 192, 232  
Output resolution (HDMI).........166  
Overview data...............................139  
P
Page size (PictBridge) .................157  
Perspective control......................217  
Photo information ............. 136, 176  
PictBridge.............................. 156, 271  
Picture Controls .................. 111, 112  
PIN-entry WPS...............................170  
Playback ..........................................135  
Playback display options...........176  
Playback folder..............................175  
Playback information........ 136, 176  
Playback menu..............................175  
Playback zoom..............................142  
Portrait (Set Picture Control)....111  
Power connector................ 236, 239  
Power switch.......................................2  
Preset manual (White balance) ......  
S
Save selected frame ....................134  
Scene auto selector....................... 25  
Scene mode ..................................... 30  
Select to send to smart device 173  
Selective color........................43, 219  
Self-portrait.........................................5  
Self-timer...........................45, 49, 187  
Sensitivity.................................67, 180  
Sepia .................................................208  
Set clock from satellite................. 79  
Set Picture Control.......................112  
Setup menu....................................195  
Shade (White balance)...............101  
Shooting data................................138  
Shooting menu.............................177  
Shutter-priority auto..................... 85  
U
Update A-GPS data........................ 80  
USB cable .............................. 153, 156  
UTC.............................................74, 139  
V
Vibration reduction ..............18, 267  
Video mode.......................... 164, 202  
View SSID ........................................171  
Viewfinder........................... 4, 15, 259  
Viewfinder eyepiece cap ............. 50  
Viewfinder grid display ..............188  
ViewNX 2............................... 151, 153  
Vivid (Set Picture Control).........111  
Press the shutter-release button  
all the way down .......................... 21  
Press the shutter-release button  
halfway...................................... 20, 21  
Print (DPOF).......................... 159, 163  
Print date.........................................190  
Volume....................................130, 149  
W
Warm filter (Filter effects)..........209  
WB .....................................................101  
WB bracketing (Auto bracketing  
set)...................................................108  
White balance ...............................101  
Wide-area AF .................................120  
Wi-Fi.......................................... xvi, 167  
Wind noise reduction.................128  
Wireless.................................... xvi, 167  
Wireless Mobile Utility ......167, 168  
Wireless remote controller71,203,  
278  
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except for brief quotation  
in critical articles or reviews), may be made without written authorization from NIKON  
CORPORATION.  
SB3H01(11)  
6MB18411-01  

QSC Audio Car Speaker CSM12 User Manual
Pyramid Car Audio CDR 36DX User Manual
Polk Audio Subwoofer PSW1200 User Manual
Ovideon LCS4230 User Manual
Orion Car Audio HCCA D2400 User Manual
Olympus CAMEDIA C 150 User Manual
LG Electronics HT355SD User Manual
Kenwood KDC 2020 User Manual
Kenwood Car Stereo System KDC 3454UQ User Manual
Kalorik Team International Group Blender 16911 User Manual